Search the source libraries

Smoking cessation for people with severe mental illness (SCIMITAR+): a pragmatic randomised controlled trial.

Background: People with severe mental illnesses such as schizophrenia are three times more likely to smoke than the wider population, contributing to widening health inequalities. Smoking remains the largest modifiable risk factor for this health inequality, but people with severe mental illness have not historically engaged with smoking cessation services. We aimed to test the effectiveness of a combined behavioural and pharmacological smoking cessation intervention targeted specifically at people with severe mental illness. Methods: In the smoking cessation intervention for severe mental illness (SCIMITAR+) trial, a pragmatic, randomised controlled study, we recruited heavy smokers with bipolar disorder or schizophrenia from 16 primary care and 21 community-based mental health sites in the UK. Participants were eligible if they were aged 18 years or older, and smoked at least five cigarettes per day. Exclusion criteria included substantial comorbid drug or alcohol problems and people who lacked capacity to consent at the time of recruitment. Using computer-generated random numbers, participants were randomly assigned (1:1) to a bespoke smoking cessation intervention or to usual care. Participants, mental health specialists, and primary care physicians were unmasked to assignment. The bespoke smoking cessation intervention consisted of behavioural support from a mental health smoking cessation practitioner and pharmacological aids for smoking cessation, with adaptations for people with severe mental illness-such as, extended pre-quit sessions, cut down to quit, and home visits. Access to pharmacotherapy was via primary care after discussion with the smoking cessation specialist. Under usual care participants were offered access to local smoking cessation services not specifically designed for people with severe mental illnesses. The primary endpoint was smoking cessation at 12 months ascertained via carbon monoxide measurements below 10 parts per million and self-reported cessation for the past 7 days. Secondary endpoints were biologically verified smoking cessation at 6 months; number of cigarettes smoked per day, Fagerström Test for Nicotine Dependence (FTND) and Motivation to Quit (MTQ) questionnaire; general and mental health functioning determined via the Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (PHQ-9), the Generalised Anxiety Disorder-7 (GAD-7) questionnaire, and 12-Item Short Form Health Survey (SF-12); and body-mass index (BMI). This trial was registerd with the ISRCTN registry, number ISRCTN72955454, and is complete. Findings: Between Oct 7, 2015, and Dec 16, 2016, 526 eligible patients were randomly assigned to the bespoke smoking cessation intervention (n=265) or usual care (n=261). 309 (59%) participants were male, median age was 47·2 years (IQR 36·3-54·5), with high nicotine dependence (mean 24 cigarettes per day [SD 13·2]), and the most common severe mental disorders were schizophrenia or other psychotic illness (n=343 [65%]), bipolar disorder (n=115 [22%]), and schizoaffective disorder (n=66 [13%]). 234 (88%) of intervention participants engaged with the treatment programme and attended 6·4 (SD 3·5) quit smoking sessions, with an average duration of 39 min (SD 17; median 35 min, range 5-120). Verified quit data at 12 months were available for 219 (84%) of 261 usual care and 223 (84%) of 265 intervention participants. The proportion of participants who had quit at 12 months was higher in the intervention group than in the usual care group, but non-significantly (34 [15%] of 223 [13% of those assigned to group] vs 22 [10%] of 219 [8% of those assigned to group], risk difference 5·2%, 95% CI -1·0 to 11·4; odds ratio [OR] 1·6, 95% CI 0·9 to 2·9; p=0·10). The proportion of participants who quit at 6 months was significantly higher in the intervention group than in the usual care group (32 [14%] of 226 vs 14 [6%] of 217; risk difference 7·7%, 95% CI 2·1 to 13·3; OR 2·4, 95% CI 1·2 to 4·6; p=0·010). The incidence rate ratio for number of cigarettes smoked per day at 6 months was 0·90 (95% CI 0·80 to 1·01; p=0·079), and at 12 months was 1·00 (0·89 to 1·13; p=0·95). At both 6 months and 12 months, the intervention group was non-significantly favoured in the FTND (adjusted mean difference 6 months -0·18, 95% CI -0·53 to 0·17, p=0·32; and 12 months -0·01, -0·39 to 0·38, p=0·97) and MTQ questionnaire (adjusted mean difference 0·58, -0·01 to 1·17, p=0·056; and 12 months 0·64, 0·04 to 1·24, p=0·038). The PHQ-9 showed no difference between the groups (adjusted mean difference at 6 months 0·20, 95% CI -0·85 to 1·24 vs 12 months -0·12, -1·18 to 0·94). For the SF-12 survey, we saw evidence of improvement in physical health in the intervention group at 6 months (adjusted mean difference 1·75, 95% CI 0·21 to 3·28), but this difference was not evident at 12 months (0·59, -1·07 to 2·26); and we saw no difference in mental health between the groups at 6 or 12 months (adjusted mean difference at 6 months -0·73, 95% CI -2·82 to 1·36, and 12 months -0·41, -2·35 to 1·53). The GAD-7 questionnaire showed no difference between the groups (adjusted mean difference at 6 months -0·32 95% CI -1·26 to 0·62 vs 12 months -0·10, -1·05 to 0·86). No difference in BMI was seen between the groups (adjusted mean difference 6 months 0·16, 95% CI -0·54 to 0·85; 12 months 0·25, -0·62 to 1·13). Interpretation: This bespoke intervention is a candidate model of smoking cessation for clinicians and policy makers to address high prevalence of smoking. The incidence of quitting at 6 months shows that smoking cessation can be achieved, but the waning of this effect by 12 months means more effort is needed for sustained quitting. Funding: National Institute for Health Research Health Technology Assessment Programme.

The lancet. Psychiatry · randomised controlled trial · 134 citationsread the source →

Geriatric assessment-identified deficits in older cancer patients with normal performance status.

Background: We investigated whether a brief geriatric assessment (GA) would identify important patient deficits that could affect treatment tolerance and care outcomes within a sample of older cancer patients rated as functionally normal (80%-100%) on the Karnofsky performance status (KPS) scale. Methods: Cancer patients aged ≥65 years were assessed using a brief GA that included both professionally and patient-scored KPS and measures of comorbidity, polypharmacy, cognition, function, nutrition, and psychosocial status. Data were analyzed using descriptive statistics and multivariable logistic regression. Results: The sample included 984 patients: mean age was 73 years (range: 65-99 years), 74% were female, and 89% were white. GA was conducted before (23%), during (41%), or after (36%) treatment. Overall, 54% had a breast cancer diagnosis (n = 528), and 46% (n = 456) had cancers at other sites. Moreover, 81% of participants (n = 796) had both professionally and self-rated KPS ≥80, defined as functionally normal, and those patients are the focus of analysis. In this subsample, 550 (69%) had at least 1 GA-identified deficit, 222 (28%) had 1 deficit, 140 (18%) had 2 deficits, and 188 (24%) had ≥3 deficits. Specifically, 43% reported taking ≥9 medications daily, 28% had decreased social activity, 25% had ≥4 comorbidities, 23% had ≥1 impairment in instrumental activities of daily living, 18% had a Timed Up and Go time ≥14 seconds, 18% had ≥5% unintentional weight loss, and 12% had a Mental Health Index score ≤76. Conclusion: Within this sample of older cancer patients who were rated as functionally normal by KPS, GA identified important deficits that could affect treatment tolerance and outcomes.

The oncologist · clinical trial · 171 citationsread the source →

A double-blind, randomized clinical trial comparing soybean oil-based versus olive oil-based lipid emulsions in adult medical-surgical intensive care unit patients requiring parenteral nutrition.

Objective: Parenteral nutrition has been associated with metabolic and infectious complications in intensive care unit patients. The underlying mechanism for the high risk of complications is not known but may relate to the proinflammatory effects of soybean oil-based lipid emulsions, the only Food and Drug Administration-approved lipid formulation for clinical use. Design: Prospective, double-blind, randomized, controlled trial. Setting: Medical-surgical intensive care units from a major urban teaching hospital and a tertiary referral university hospital. Patients: Adult medical-surgical intensive care unit patients. Intervention: Parenteral nutrition containing soybean oil-based (Intralipid) or olive oil-based (ClinOleic) lipid emulsions. Measurements: Differences in hospital clinical outcomes (nosocomial infections and noninfectious complications), hospital length of stay, glycemic control, inflammatory and oxidative stress markers, and granulocyte and monocyte functions between study groups. Results: A total of 100 patients were randomized to either soybean oil-based parenteral nutrition or olive oil-based parenteral nutrition for up to 28 days. A total of 49 patients received soybean oil-based parenteral nutrition (age 51 ± 15 yrs, body mass index 27 ± 6 kg/m2, and Acute Physiology and Chronic Health Evaluation II score 15.5 ± 7 [±SD]), and a total of 51 patients received olive oil-based lipid emulsion in parenteral nutrition (age 46 ± 19 yrs, body mass index 27 ± 8 kg/m2, and Acute Physiology and Chronic Health Evaluation II score 15.1 ± 6 [±SD]) for a mean duration of 12.9 ± 8 days. The mean hospital blood glucose concentration during parenteral nutrition was 129 ± 14 mg/dL, without differences between groups. Patients treated with soybean oil-based and olive oil-based parenteral nutrition had a similar length of stay (47 ± 47 days and 41 ± 36 days, p = .49), mortality (16.3% and 9.8%, p = .38), nosocomial infections (43% vs. 57%, p = .16), and acute renal failure (26% vs. 18%, p = .34). In addition, there were no differences in inflammatory and oxidative stress markers or in granulocyte and monocyte functions between groups. Conclusion: The administration of parenteral nutrition containing soybean oil-based and olive oil-based lipid emulsion resulted in similar rates of infectious and noninfectious complications and no differences in glycemic control, inflammatory and oxidative stress markers, and immune function in critically ill adults.

Critical care medicine · randomised controlled trial · 43 citationsread the source →

Does active referral by a doctor or 12-Step peer improve 12-Step meeting attendance? Results from a pilot randomised control trial.

Background: Active engagement in 12-Step self-help groups (SHG) is associated with improvements in substance use outcomes during and after treatment, yet levels of participation in SHG meetings in the U.K. remain low. Method: An RCT investigating the impact of active referral to SHG, delivered by doctors or 12-Step peers during inpatient treatment on both inpatient and post-treatment meeting attendance was conducted. 151 inpatients with alcohol, opiate, crack-cocaine or benzodiazepine dependence undergoing detoxification, received one of two active referral interventions: 12-Step peer intervention (PI), doctor intervention (DI), or no intervention (NI). 83% of the sample was followed up, 2-3 months following discharge. Results: Active referral interventions significantly increased attendance at 12-Step meetings during inpatient treatment (88% versus 73%, p<.05). Rates of post-discharge meeting attendance were PI=64%, DI=48%, NI=33%, with those in the PI group significantly (OR=3.6; CI=1.3, 9.8) more likely to have attended. Inpatient meeting attenders were three times as likely to have attended meetings post-discharge (59% versus 20%, p<.01), and post-discharge meeting attenders reported significantly higher abstinence rates (60.8% versus 39.2%, p<.05) at follow-up. However, abstinence rates did not differ significantly across intervention groups (44% [PI], 41% [DI] and 36% [NI]). Conclusion: Attendance at 12-Step SHGs is associated with greater rates of abstinence and active referral, especially by 12-Step peers, increases 12-Step SHG attendance rates. However, improved clinical outcomes among attendees might not occur until stronger recovery peer support networks are established. These results show promise for the benefit of incorporating Twelve Step Facilitation into U.K. treatment settings.

Drug and alcohol dependence · randomised controlled trial · 43 citationsread the source →

Populations and Interventions for Palliative and End-of-Life Care: A Systematic Review.

Importance: Evidence supports palliative care effectiveness. Given workforce constraints and the costs of new services, payers and providers need help to prioritize their investments. They need to know which patients to target, which personnel to hire, and which services best improve outcomes. Objective: To inform how payers and providers should identify patients with "advanced illness" and the specific interventions they should implement, we reviewed the evidence to identify (1) individuals appropriate for palliative care and (2) elements of health service interventions (personnel involved, use of multidisciplinary teams, and settings of care) effective in achieving better outcomes for patients, caregivers, and the healthcare system. Evidence review: Systematic searches of MEDLINE, EMBASE, PsycINFO, Web of Science, and Cochrane Database of Systematic Reviews databases (1/1/2001-1/8/2015). Results: Randomized controlled trials (124) met inclusion criteria. The majority of studies in cancer (49%, 38 of 77 studies) demonstrated statistically significant patient or caregiver outcomes (e.g., p < 0.05), as did those in congestive heart failure (CHF) (62%, 13 of 21), chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD; 58%, 11 of 19), and dementia (60%, 15 of 25). Most prognostic criteria used clinicians' judgment (73%, 22 of 30). Most interventions included a nurse (70%, 69 of 98), and many were nurse-only (39%, 27 of 69). Social workers were well represented, and home-based approaches were common (56%, 70 of 124). Home interventions with visits were more effective than those without (64%, 28 of 44; vs. 46%, 12 of 26). Interventions improved communication and care planning (70%, 12 of 18), psychosocial health (36%, 12 of 33, for depressive symptoms; 41%, 9 of 22, for anxiety), and patient (40%, 8 of 20) and caregiver experiences (63%, 5 of 8). Many interventions reduced hospital use (65%, 11 of 17), but most other economic outcomes, including costs, were poorly characterized. Palliative care teams did not reliably lower healthcare costs (20%, 2 of 10). Conclusions: Palliative care improves cancer, CHF, COPD, and dementia outcomes. Effective models include nurses, social workers, and home-based components, and a focus on communication, psychosocial support, and the patient or caregiver experience. High-quality research on intervention costs and cost outcomes in palliative care is limited.

Journal of palliative medicine · systematic review · 135 citationsread the source →

Trial for Reducing Weight Retention in New Mums: a randomised controlled trial evaluating a low intensity, postpartum weight management programme.

Background: Failure to return to pregnancy weight by 6 months postpartum is associated with long-term obesity, as well as adverse health outcomes. This research evaluated a postpartum weight management programme for women with a body mass index (BMI) > 25 kg m(-2) that combined behaviour change principles and a low-intensity delivery format with postpartum nutrition information. Methods: Women were randomised at 24-28 weeks to control (supported care; SC) or intervention (enhanced care; EC) groups, stratified by BMI cohort. At 36 weeks of gestation, SC women received a 'nutrition for breastfeeding' resource and EC women received a nutrition assessment and goal-setting session about post-natal nutrition, plus a 6-month correspondence intervention requiring return of self-monitoring sheets. Weight change, anthropometry, diet, physical activity, breastfeeding, fasting glucose and insulin measures were assessed at 6 weeks and 6 months postpartum. Results: Seventy-seven percent (40 EC and 41 SC) of the 105 women approached were recruited; 36 EC and 35 SC women received a programme and 66.7% and 48.6% completed the study, respectively. No significant differences were observed between any outcomes. Median [interquartile range (IQR)] weight change was EC: -1.1 (9.5) kg versus SC: -1.1 (7.5) kg (6 weeks to 6 months) and EC: +1.0 (8.7) kg versus SC: +2.3 (9) kg (prepregnancy to 6 months). Intervention women breastfed for half a month longer than control women (180 versus 164 days; P = 0.10). An average of 2.3 out of six activity sheets per participant was returned. Conclusions: Despite low intervention engagement, the high retention rate suggests this remains an area of interest to women. Future strategies must facilitate women's engagement, be individually tailored, and include features that support behaviour change to decrease women's risk of chronic health issues.

Journal of human nutrition and dietetics : the official journal of the British Dietetic Association · randomised controlled trial · 30 citationsread the source →

The relevance of cognitive emotion regulation to psychotic symptoms - A systematic review and meta-analysis.

Numerous studies emphasise the pivotal role of negative affect in the formation and maintenance of positive symptoms, which moves emotion regulation (ER) as a contributing factor into focus. We systematically reviewed and meta-analysed case-control studies reporting cross-sectional, correlative and experimental data of ER strategies in patients with psychotic disorders. In total, 42 studies were eligible, providing data for 2498 subjects and 3381 healthy controls. Questionnaire-based cross-sectional data (k=39) indicated strongest effects for rumination (g=-0,67 [-0,85 to -0,48]), self-blaming (g=-0,56; [-0,76 to -0,37]) and distraction (g=0,55 [0,11 to 0,98]). Suppression was more frequently (g=-0,36 [-0,56 to -0,16]) and cognitive reappraisal less frequently used (g=0,41 [0,28 to 0,55]), but heterogeneity was high. Correlative data (k=6) supported the assumption of an association between maladaptive strategies and positive symptoms (r=0,34 [0,22 to 0,44]). Less evidence of group differences was found in the experimental studies (k=3). The findings support the notion that ER is markedly impaired in patients with psychotic disorders. However, future research will need to further clarify the extent to which difficulties continue to exist after controlling for context and emotion intensity. The large effects for rumination and self-blaming point to promising treatment targets but also raise questions concerning the specifity of findings.

Clinical psychology review · meta-analysis · 81 citationsread the source →

Diagnostic precision of PET imaging and functional MRI in disorders of consciousness: a clinical validation study.

Background: Bedside clinical examinations can have high rates of misdiagnosis of unresponsive wakefulness syndrome (vegetative state) or minimally conscious state. The diagnostic and prognostic usefulness of neuroimaging-based approaches has not been established in a clinical setting. We did a validation study of two neuroimaging-based diagnostic methods: PET imaging and functional MRI (fMRI). Methods: For this clinical validation study, we included patients referred to the University Hospital of Liège, Belgium, between January, 2008, and June, 2012, who were diagnosed by our unit with unresponsive wakefulness syndrome, locked-in syndrome, or minimally conscious state with traumatic or non-traumatic causes. We did repeated standardised clinical assessments with the Coma Recovery Scale-Revised (CRS-R), cerebral (18)F-fluorodeoxyglucose (FDG) PET, and fMRI during mental activation tasks. We calculated the diagnostic accuracy of both imaging methods with CRS-R diagnosis as reference. We assessed outcome after 12 months with the Glasgow Outcome Scale-Extended. Findings: We included 41 patients with unresponsive wakefulness syndrome, four with locked-in syndrome, and 81 in a minimally conscious state (48=traumatic, 78=non-traumatic; 110=chronic, 16=subacute). (18)F-FDG PET had high sensitivity for identification of patients in a minimally conscious state (93%, 95% CI 85-98) and high congruence (85%, 77-90) with behavioural CRS-R scores. The active fMRI method was less sensitive at diagnosis of a minimally conscious state (45%, 30-61) and had lower overall congruence with behavioural scores (63%, 51-73) than PET imaging. (18)F-FDG PET correctly predicted outcome in 75 of 102 patients (74%, 64-81), and fMRI in 36 of 65 patients (56%, 43-67). 13 of 41 (32%) of the behaviourally unresponsive patients (ie, diagnosed as unresponsive with CRS-R) showed brain activity compatible with (minimal) consciousness (ie, activity associated with consciousness, but diminished compared with fully conscious individuals) on at least one neuroimaging test; 69% of these (9 of 13) patients subsequently recovered consciousness. Interpretation: Cerebral (18)F-FDG PET could be used to complement bedside examinations and predict long-term recovery of patients with unresponsive wakefulness syndrome. Active fMRI might also be useful for differential diagnosis, but seems to be less accurate. Funding: The Belgian National Funds for Scientific Research (FNRS), Fonds Léon Fredericq, the European Commission, the James McDonnell Foundation, the Mind Science Foundation, the French Speaking Community Concerted Research Action, the University of Copenhagen, and the University of Liège.

Lancet (London, England) · cohort or longitudinal · 352 citationsread the source →

A meta-ethnography to understand the experience of living with urinary incontinence: 'is it just part and parcel of life?'

Background: Urinary incontinence (UI) is highly prevalent and affects the lives of many men and women. We aimed to conduct a qualitative evidence synthesis (QES) to explore the experience of living with UI and to develop a conceptual model that can help us to understand this experience, and the potential barriers to appropriate healthcare. Methods: We used the methods of meta-ethnography developed by Noblit and Hare and recently refined for larger studies. Meta-ethnography involves identifying concepts from the studies and abstracting these concepts into a line of argument. We searched for studies that explored the experience of adults with UI. We used the GRADE-CERQual framework to assess confidence in review findings. Results: We screened 2307 titles, 429 abstracts, 107 full texts and included 41 studies (36 unique samples) in the synthesis. We organised the concepts into 26 conceptual categories, which we further abstracted into 6 themes: (1) Am I ill or is this normal? (2) It effects who I am and how I feel; (3) I feel stigmatised, ashamed and guilty; (4) talking can be difficult but it can help; (5) keeping incontinence under control; (6) have I got to the point that I need help? Our model conceptualises living with UI as navigating antagonists: Is UI normal or am I ill? Do I need help or am I managing? Do I keep UI to myself (and manage alone) or do I tell other people (and get the support that I need)? Do I use control strategies that focus on concealing (avoid risky situations, wear pads) versus, I use strategies that focus on improving the bodily function to improve continence. Our model highlights the experience of stigma, shame and guilt which exert a pull towards concealment. Conclusions: The culture of secrecy and profound sense of shame is barrier to seeking help. An environment which reduces the shame and stigma of UI may help people to switch the focus to strategies that will improve continence, rather than conceal incontinence.

BMC urology · 50 citationsread the source →

Adherence to the Mediterranean diet pattern, cognitive status and depressive symptoms in an elderly non-institutionalized population.

Introduction: Scientific evidence indicates that adherence to the Mediterranean diet protects against the deterioration of cognitive status and depressive symptoms during aging. However, few studies have been conducted in elderly non-institutionalized subjects. Objective: This study evaluated the relation between the adherence to the Mediterranean dietary pattern and cognitive status and depressive symptoms in an elderly population over 75 years. Methods: A cross-sectional study was conducted in a Mediterranean city (Garrucha, Spain) in 79 elderly people over 75 (36 men and 41 women). Adherence to the Mediterranean dietary pattern was determined using the Mediterranean Diet Adherence Screener (MEDAS). Cognitive function was determined by the Mini Mental State Examination (MMSE), and depressive symptoms were assessed by the Geriatric Depression Scale (GDS). Results: Most of population showed a very high adherence to the Mediterranean diet pattern and optimal cognitive and affective status. They consumed olive oil as their main source of fat, high levels of fish and fruit, low levels of foods with added sugars, and a low consumption of red meat. A significant relation between the MEDAS and MMSE scores was found. However, no relationship was observed between the MEDAS and GDS. Conclusions: The Mediterranean diet pattern was positively related with the cognitive function, although the infl uence of a healthy dietary pattern on the symptomatology of depression was unclear. However, an effective strategy against cognitive function and depression would be to improve physical activity rates, establish lifelong healthy eating habits, and consume a nutritionally-rich diet in order to enhance quality of life of the elderly.

Nutricion hospitalaria · 32 citationsread the source →

Effect of Psychological Intervention on Fear of Cancer Recurrence: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis.

Purpose: Fear of cancer recurrence (FCR) is a significantly distressing problem that affects a substantial number of patients with and survivors of cancer; however, the overall efficacy of available psychological interventions on FCR remains unknown. We therefore evaluated this in the present systematic review and meta-analysis. Methods: We searched key electronic databases to identify trials that evaluated the effect of psychological interventions on FCR among patients with and survivors of cancer. Controlled trials were subjected to meta-analysis, and the moderating influence of study characteristics on the effect were examined. Overall quality of evidence was evaluated using the GRADE system. Open trials were narratively reviewed to explore ongoing developments in the field (PROSPERO registration no.: CRD42017076514). Results: A total of 23 controlled trials (21 randomized controlled trials) and nine open trials were included. Small effects (Hedges's g) were found both at postintervention (g = 0.33; 95% CI, 0.20 to 0.46; P < .001) and at follow-up (g = 0.28; 95% CI, 0.17 to 0.40; P < .001). Effects at postintervention of contemporary cognitive behavioral therapies (CBTs; g = 0.42) were larger than those of traditional CBTs (g = 0.24; β = .22; 95% CI, .04 to .41; P = .018). At follow-up, larger effects were associated with shorter time to follow-up (β = -.01; 95% CI, -.01 to -.00; P = .027) and group-based formats (β = .18; 95% CI, .01 to .36; P = .041). A GRADE evaluation indicated evidence of moderate strength for effects of psychological intervention for FCR. Conclusion: Psychological interventions for FCR revealed a small but robust effect at postintervention, which was largely maintained at follow-up. Larger postintervention effects were found for contemporary CBTs that were focused on processes of cognition-for example, worry, rumination, and attentional bias-rather than the content, and aimed to change the way in which the individual relates to his or her inner experiences. Future trials could investigate how to further optimize and tailor interventions to individual patients' FCR presentation.

Journal of clinical oncology : official journal of the American Society of Clinical Oncology · meta-analysis · 292 citationsread the source →

Psychiatric and neuropsychiatric presentations associated with severe coronavirus infections: a systematic review and meta-analysis with comparison to the COVID-19 pandemic.

Background: Before the COVID-19 pandemic, coronaviruses caused two noteworthy outbreaks: severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS), starting in 2002, and Middle East respiratory syndrome (MERS), starting in 2012. We aimed to assess the psychiatric and neuropsychiatric presentations of SARS, MERS, and COVID-19. Methods: In this systematic review and meta-analysis, MEDLINE, Embase, PsycINFO, and the Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature databases (from their inception until March 18, 2020), and medRxiv, bioRxiv, and PsyArXiv (between Jan 1, 2020, and April 10, 2020) were searched by two independent researchers for all English-language studies or preprints reporting data on the psychiatric and neuropsychiatric presentations of individuals with suspected or laboratory-confirmed coronavirus infection (SARS coronavirus, MERS coronavirus, or SARS coronavirus 2). We excluded studies limited to neurological complications without specified neuropsychiatric presentations and those investigating the indirect effects of coronavirus infections on the mental health of people who are not infected, such as those mediated through physical distancing measures such as self-isolation or quarantine. Outcomes were psychiatric signs or symptoms; symptom severity; diagnoses based on ICD-10, DSM-IV, or the Chinese Classification of Mental Disorders (third edition) or psychometric scales; quality of life; and employment. Both the systematic review and the meta-analysis stratified outcomes across illness stages (acute vs post-illness) for SARS and MERS. We used a random-effects model for the meta-analysis, and the meta-analytical effect size was prevalence for relevant outcomes, I2 statistics, and assessment of study quality. Findings: 1963 studies and 87 preprints were identified by the systematic search, of which 65 peer-reviewed studies and seven preprints met inclusion criteria. The number of coronavirus cases of the included studies was 3559, ranging from 1 to 997, and the mean age of participants in studies ranged from 12·2 years (SD 4·1) to 68·0 years (single case report). Studies were from China, Hong Kong, South Korea, Canada, Saudi Arabia, France, Japan, Singapore, the UK, and the USA. Follow-up time for the post-illness studies varied between 60 days and 12 years. The systematic review revealed that during the acute illness, common symptoms among patients admitted to hospital for SARS or MERS included confusion (36 [27·9%; 95% CI 20·5-36·0] of 129 patients), depressed mood (42 [32·6%; 24·7-40·9] of 129), anxiety (46 [35·7%; 27·6-44·2] of 129), impaired memory (44 [34·1%; 26·2-42·5] of 129), and insomnia (54 [41·9%; 22·5-50·5] of 129). Steroid-induced mania and psychosis were reported in 13 (0·7%) of 1744 patients with SARS in the acute stage in one study. In the post-illness stage, depressed mood (35 [10·5%; 95% CI 7·5-14·1] of 332 patients), insomnia (34 [12·1%; 8·6-16·3] of 280), anxiety (21 [12·3%; 7·7-17·7] of 171), irritability (28 [12·8%; 8·7-17·6] of 218), memory impairment (44 [18·9%; 14·1-24·2] of 233), fatigue (61 [19·3%; 15·1-23·9] of 316), and in one study traumatic memories (55 [30·4%; 23·9-37·3] of 181) and sleep disorder (14 [100·0%; 88·0-100·0] of 14) were frequently reported. The meta-analysis indicated that in the post-illness stage the point prevalence of post-traumatic stress disorder was 32·2% (95% CI 23·7-42·0; 121 of 402 cases from four studies), that of depression was 14·9% (12·1-18·2; 77 of 517 cases from five studies), and that of anxiety disorders was 14·8% (11·1-19·4; 42 of 284 cases from three studies). 446 (76·9%; 95% CI 68·1-84·6) of 580 patients from six studies had returned to work at a mean follow-up time of 35·3 months (SD 40·1). When data for patients with COVID-19 were examined (including preprint data), there was evidence for delirium (confusion in 26 [65%] of 40 intensive care unit patients and agitation in 40 [69%] of 58 intensive care unit patients in one study, and altered consciousness in 17 [21%] of 82 patients who subsequently died in another study). At discharge, 15 (33%) of 45 patients with COVID-19 who were assessed had a dysexecutive syndrome in one study. At the time of writing, there were two reports of hypoxic encephalopathy and one report of encephalitis. 68 (94%) of the 72 studies were of either low or medium quality. Interpretation: If infection with SARS-CoV-2 follows a similar course to that with SARS-CoV or MERS-CoV, most patients should recover without experiencing mental illness. SARS-CoV-2 might cause delirium in a significant proportion of patients in the acute stage. Clinicians should be aware of the possibility of depression, anxiety, fatigue, post-traumatic stress disorder, and rarer neuropsychiatric syndromes in the longer term. Funding: Wellcome Trust, UK National Institute for Health Research (NIHR), UK Medical Research Council, NIHR Biomedical Research Centre at University College London Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust and University College London.

The lancet. Psychiatry · meta-analysis · 1531 citationsread the source →

Interactive telemedicine: effects on professional practice and health care outcomes.

Background: Telemedicine (TM) is the use of telecommunication systems to deliver health care at a distance. It has the potential to improve patient health outcomes, access to health care and reduce healthcare costs. As TM applications continue to evolve it is important to understand the impact TM might have on patients, healthcare professionals and the organisation of care. Objectives: To assess the effectiveness, acceptability and costs of interactive TM as an alternative to, or in addition to, usual care (i.e. face-to-face care, or telephone consultation). Search methods: We searched the Effective Practice and Organisation of Care (EPOC) Group's specialised register, CENTRAL, MEDLINE, EMBASE, five other databases and two trials registers to June 2013, together with reference checking, citation searching, handsearching and contact with study authors to identify additional studies. Selection criteria: We considered randomised controlled trials of interactive TM that involved direct patient-provider interaction and was delivered in addition to, or substituting for, usual care compared with usual care alone, to participants with any clinical condition. We excluded telephone only interventions and wholly automatic self-management TM interventions. Data collection and analysis: For each condition, we pooled outcome data that were sufficiently homogenous using fixed effect meta-analysis. We reported risk ratios (RR) and 95% confidence intervals (CI) for dichotomous outcomes, and mean differences (MD) for continuous outcomes. Main results: We included 93 eligible trials (N = 22,047 participants), which evaluated the effectiveness of interactive TM delivered in addition to (32% of studies), as an alternative to (57% of studies), or partly substituted for usual care (11%) as compared to usual care alone. The included studies recruited patients with the following clinical conditions: cardiovascular disease (36), diabetes (21), respiratory conditions (9), mental health or substance abuse conditions (7), conditions requiring a specialist consultation (6), co morbidities (3), urogenital conditions (3), neurological injuries and conditions (2), gastrointestinal conditions (2), neonatal conditions requiring specialist care (2), solid organ transplantation (1), and cancer (1).Telemedicine provided remote monitoring (55 studies), or real-time video-conferencing (38 studies), which was used either alone or in combination. The main TM function varied depending on clinical condition, but fell typically into one of the following six categories, with some overlap: i) monitoring of a chronic condition to detect early signs of deterioration and prompt treatment and advice, (41); ii) provision of treatment or rehabilitation (12), for example the delivery of cognitive behavioural therapy, or incontinence training; iii) education and advice for self-management (23), for example nurses delivering education to patients with diabetes or providing support to parents of very low birth weight infants or to patients with home parenteral nutrition; iv) specialist consultations for diagnosis and treatment decisions (8), v) real-time assessment of clinical status, for example post-operative assessment after minor operation or follow-up after solid organ transplantation (8) vi), screening, for angina (1).The type of data transmitted by the patient, the frequency of data transfer, (e.g. telephone, e-mail, SMS) and frequency of interactions between patient and healthcare provider varied across studies, as did the type of healthcare provider/s and healthcare system involved in delivering the intervention. We found no difference between groups for all-cause mortality for patients with heart failure (16 studies; N = 5239; RR:0.89, 95% CI 0.76 to 1.03, P = 0.12; I(2) = 44%) (moderate to high certainty of evidence) at a median of six months follow-up. Admissions to hospital (11 studies; N = 4529) ranged from a decrease of 64% to an increase of 60% at median eight months follow-up (moderate certainty of evidence). We found some evidence of improved quality of life (five studies; N = 482; MD:-4.39, 95% CI -7.94 to -0.83; P < 0.02; I(2) = 0%) (moderate certainty of evidence) for those allocated to TM as compared with usual care at a median three months follow-up. In studies recruiting participants with diabetes (16 studies; N = 2768) we found lower glycated haemoglobin (HbA1c %) levels in those allocated to TM than in controls (MD -0.31, 95% CI -0.37 to -0.24; P < 0.00001; I(2)= 42%, P = 0.04) (high certainty of evidence) at a median of nine months follow-up. We found some evidence for a decrease in LDL (four studies, N = 1692; MD -12.45, 95% CI -14.23 to -10.68; P < 0.00001; I(2 =) 0%) (moderate certainty of evidence), and blood pressure (four studies, N = 1770: MD: SBP:-4.33, 95% CI -5.30 to -3.35, P < 0.00001; I(2) = 17%; DBP: -2.75 95% CI -3.28 to -2.22, P < 0.00001; I(2) = 45% (moderate certainty evidence), in TM as compared with usual care. Seven studies that recruited participants with different mental health and substance abuse problems, reported no differences in the effect of therapy delivered over video-conferencing, as compared to face-to-face delivery. Findings from the other studies were inconsistent; there was some evidence that monitoring via TM improved blood pressure control in participants with hypertension, and a few studies reported improved symptom scores for those with a respiratory condition. Studies recruiting participants requiring mental health services and those requiring specialist consultation for a dermatological condition reported no differences between groups. Authors' conclusions: The findings in our review indicate that the use of TM in the management of heart failure appears to lead to similar health outcomes as face-to-face or telephone delivery of care; there is evidence that TM can improve the control of blood glucose in those with diabetes. The cost to a health service, and acceptability by patients and healthcare professionals, is not clear due to limited data reported for these outcomes. The effectiveness of TM may depend on a number of different factors, including those related to the study population e.g. the severity of the condition and the disease trajectory of the participants, the function of the intervention e.g., if it is used for monitoring a chronic condition, or to provide access to diagnostic services, as well as the healthcare provider and healthcare system involved in delivering the intervention.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · meta-analysis · 456 citationsread the source →

Comparison of the dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor vildagliptin and the sulphonylurea gliclazide in combination with metformin, in Muslim patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus fasting during Ramadan: results of the VECTOR study.

Objective: To compare the incidence of hypoglycaemic events (HEs) in a real-world setting in Muslim patients with type 2 diabetes mellitus fasting during Ramadan. Research design and methods: We performed a ≤16-week prospective, non-interventional, two-cohort study. Data were collected 1-6 weeks before and ≤6 weeks after fasting. Patients were enrolled who had been receiving vildagliptin (50 mg twice daily) or sulphonylurea (SU) as add-on to metformin at least 4 weeks prior to fasting. Main outcome measures: The primary efficacy endpoint was incidence of HEs during the Ramadan fast. Changes in glycated haemoglobin (HbA(1c)) and body weight, as well as adherence to treatment, were also assessed. Results: Seventy-two patients were enrolled (vildagliptin, n = 30; SU, n = 41; no treatment, n = 1), of whom 23 (76.7%) and 36 (87.8%), respectively, completed the study. With vildagliptin, there were no HEs or severe HEs, compared with 34 HEs (15 patients, 41.7%) and one severe (grade 2) HE with SU. The mean between-group difference in the proportion who experienced at least one HE was -41.7% (95%CI -57.8%, -25.6%), p = 0.0002. Vildagliptin lowered mean HbA(1c) from 7.6% (SD 0.9%) at baseline to 7.2% (SD 0.7%) post-Ramadan, whereas SU had no effect (7.2% [SD 0.6%] vs 7.3% [SD 0.7%]; mean between-group difference -0.5% [95% CI -0.9%, -0.1%], p = 0.0262). The mean number of missed doses was markedly lower with vildagliptin (0.2 [SD 0.8] vs 7.6 [SD 14.9]; mean between-group difference -7.4 [95% CI -13.7, -1.20] doses; p = 0.0204). Body weight remained unchanged in both groups. Conclusion: Vildagliptin caused no hypoglycaemia, was well adhered to and improved HbA(1c), making it a suitable treatment option for managing fasting. Study limitations are the sample size and the lack of diet and exercise data. When extrapolated to the global Muslim population with a similar clinical background, these findings could have considerable public health and clinical implications.

Current medical research and opinion · cohort or longitudinal · 56 citationsread the source →

Pharmacological and psychotherapeutic interventions for management of obsessive-compulsive disorder in adults: a systematic review and network meta-analysis.

Background: Several interventions are available for management of obsessive-compulsive disorder in adults, but few studies have compared their relative efficacy in a single analysis. We aimed to simultaneously compare all available treatments using both direct and indirect data. Methods: In this systematic review and network meta-analysis, we searched the two controlled trials registers maintained by the Cochrane Collaboration Common Mental Disorders group for trials published up to Feb 16, 2016. We selected randomised controlled trials in which an active psychotherapeutic or pharmacological intervention had been used in adults with obsessive-compulsive disorder. We allowed all comorbidities except for schizophrenia or bipolar disorder. We excluded studies that focused exclusively on treatment-resistant patient populations defined within the same study. We extracted data from published reports. The primary outcome was symptom severity as measured by the Yale-Brown Obsessive Compulsive Scale. We report mean differences with 95% credible intervals compared with placebo. This study is registered with PROSPERO, number CRD42012002441. Findings: We identified 1480 articles in our search and included 53 articles (54 trials; 6652 participants) in the network meta-analysis. Behavioural therapy (mean difference -14·48 [95% credible interval -18·61 to -10·23]; 11 trials and 287 patients), cognitive therapy (-13·36 [-18·40 to -8·21]; six trials and 172 patients), behavioural therapy and clomipramine (-12·97 [-19·18 to -6·74]; one trial and 31 patients), cognitive behavioural therapy and fluvoxamine (-7·50 [-13·89 to -1·17]; one trial and six patients), cognitive behavioural therapy (-5·37 [-9·10 to -1·63]; nine trials and 231 patients), clomipramine (-4·72 [-6·85 to -2·60]; 13 trials and 831 patients), and all SSRIs (class effect -3·49 [95% credible interval -5·12 to -1·81]; 37 trials and 3158 patients) had greater effects than did drug placebo. Clomipramine was not better than were SSRIs (-1·23 [-3·41 to 0·94]). Psychotherapeutic interventions had a greater effect than did medications, but a serious limitation was that most psychotherapeutic trials included patients who were taking stable doses of antidepressants (12 [80%] of the 15 psychotherapy trials explicitly allowed antidepressants). Interpretation: A range of interventions is effective in the management of obsessive-compulsive disorder, but considerable uncertainty and limitations exist regarding their relative efficacy. Taking all the evidence into account, the combination of psychotherapeutic and psychopharmacological interventions is likely to be more effective than are psychotherapeutic interventions alone, at least in severe obsessive-compulsive disorder. Funding: National Institute for Health Research.

The lancet. Psychiatry · systematic review · 236 citationsread the source →

Incentives for smoking cessation.

Background: Financial incentives, monetary or vouchers, are widely used in an attempt to precipitate, reinforce and sustain behaviour change, including smoking cessation. They have been used in workplaces, in clinics and hospitals, and within community programmes. Objectives: To determine the long-term effect of incentives and contingency management programmes for smoking cessation. Search methods: For this update, we searched the Cochrane Tobacco Addiction Group Specialised Register, clinicaltrials.gov, and the International Clinical Trials Registry Platform (ICTRP). The most recent searches were conducted in July 2018. Selection criteria: We considered only randomised controlled trials, allocating individuals, workplaces, groups within workplaces, or communities to smoking cessation incentive schemes or control conditions. We included studies in a mixed-population setting (e.g. community, work-, clinic- or institution-based), and also studies in pregnant smokers. Data collection and analysis: We used standard Cochrane methods. The primary outcome measure in the mixed-population studies was abstinence from smoking at longest follow-up (at least six months from the start of the intervention). In the trials of pregnant women we used abstinence measured at the longest follow-up, and at least to the end of the pregnancy. Where available, we pooled outcome data using a Mantel-Haenzel random-effects model, with results reported as risk ratios (RRs) and 95% confidence intervals (CIs), using adjusted estimates for cluster-randomised trials. We analysed studies carried out in mixed populations separately from those carried out in pregnant populations. Main results: Thirty-three mixed-population studies met our inclusion criteria, covering more than 21,600 participants; 16 of these are new to this version of the review. Studies were set in varying locations, including community settings, clinics or health centres, workplaces, and outpatient drug clinics. We judged eight studies to be at low risk of bias, and 10 to be at high risk of bias, with the rest at unclear risk. Twenty-four of the trials were run in the USA, two in Thailand and one in the Phillipines. The rest were European. Incentives offered included cash payments or vouchers for goods and groceries, offered directly or collected and redeemable online. The pooled RR for quitting with incentives at longest follow-up (six months or more) compared with controls was 1.49 (95% CI 1.28 to 1.73; 31 RCTs, adjusted N = 20,097; I2 = 33%). Results were not sensitive to the exclusion of six studies where an incentive for cessation was offered at long-term follow up (result excluding those studies: RR 1.40, 95% CI 1.16 to 1.69; 25 RCTs; adjusted N = 17,058; I2 = 36%), suggesting the impact of incentives continues for at least some time after incentives cease. Although not always clearly reported, the total financial amount of incentives varied considerably between trials, from zero (self-deposits), to a range of between USD 45 and USD 1185. There was no clear direction of effect between trials offering low or high total value of incentives, nor those encouraging redeemable self-deposits. We included 10 studies of 2571 pregnant women. We judged two studies to be at low risk of bias, one at high risk of bias, and seven at unclear risk. When pooled, the nine trials with usable data (eight conducted in the USA and one in the UK), delivered an RR at longest follow-up (up to 24 weeks post-partum) of 2.38 (95% CI 1.54 to 3.69; N = 2273; I2 = 41%), in favour of incentives. Authors' conclusions: Overall there is high-certainty evidence that incentives improve smoking cessation rates at long-term follow-up in mixed population studies. The effectiveness of incentives appears to be sustained even when the last follow-up occurs after the withdrawal of incentives. There is also moderate-certainty evidence, limited by some concerns about risks of bias, that incentive schemes conducted among pregnant smokers improve smoking cessation rates, both at the end of pregnancy and post-partum. Current and future research might explore more precisely differences between trials offering low or high cash incentives and self-incentives (deposits), within a variety of smoking populations.

The Cochrane database of systematic reviews · systematic review · 168 citationsread the source →

Global, regional, and national incidence and mortality burden of non-COVID-19 lower respiratory infections and aetiologies, 1990-2021: a systematic analysis from the Global Burden of Disease Study 2021.

Background: Lower respiratory infections (LRIs) are a major global contributor to morbidity and mortality. In 2020-21, non-pharmaceutical interventions associated with the COVID-19 pandemic reduced not only the transmission of SARS-CoV-2, but also the transmission of other LRI pathogens. Tracking LRI incidence and mortality, as well as the pathogens responsible, can guide health-system responses and funding priorities to reduce future burden. We present estimates from the Global Burden of Diseases, Injuries, and Risk Factors Study (GBD) 2021 of the burden of non-COVID-19 LRIs and corresponding aetiologies from 1990 to 2021, inclusive of pandemic effects on the incidence and mortality of select respiratory viruses, globally, regionally, and for 204 countries and territories. Methods: We estimated mortality, incidence, and aetiology attribution for LRI, defined by the GBD as pneumonia or bronchiolitis, not inclusive of COVID-19. We analysed 26 259 site-years of mortality data using the Cause of Death Ensemble model to estimate LRI mortality rates. We analysed all available age-specific and sex-specific data sources, including published literature identified by a systematic review, as well as household surveys, hospital admissions, health insurance claims, and LRI mortality estimates, to generate internally consistent estimates of incidence and prevalence using DisMod-MR 2.1. For aetiology estimation, we analysed multiple causes of death, vital registration, hospital discharge, microbial laboratory, and literature data using a network analysis model to produce the proportion of LRI deaths and episodes attributable to the following pathogens: Acinetobacter baumannii, Chlamydia spp, Enterobacter spp, Escherichia coli, fungi, group B streptococcus, Haemophilus influenzae, influenza viruses, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Legionella spp, Mycoplasma spp, polymicrobial infections, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, and other viruses (ie, the aggregate of all viruses studied except influenza and RSV), as well as a residual category of other bacterial pathogens. Findings: Globally, in 2021, we estimated 344 million (95% uncertainty interval [UI] 325-364) incident episodes of LRI, or 4350 episodes (4120-4610) per 100 000 population, and 2·18 million deaths (1·98-2·36), or 27·7 deaths (25·1-29·9) per 100 000. 502 000 deaths (406 000-611 000) were in children younger than 5 years, among which 254 000 deaths (197 000-320 000) occurred in countries with a low Socio-demographic Index. Of the 18 modelled pathogen categories in 2021, S pneumoniae was responsible for the highest proportions of LRI episodes and deaths, with an estimated 97·9 million (92·1-104·0) episodes and 505 000 deaths (454 000-555 000) globally. The pathogens responsible for the second and third highest episode counts globally were other viral aetiologies (46·4 million [43·6-49·3] episodes) and Mycoplasma spp (25·3 million [23·5-27·2]), while those responsible for the second and third highest death counts were S aureus (424 000 [380 000-459 000]) and K pneumoniae (176 000 [158 000-194 000]). From 1990 to 2019, the global all-age non-COVID-19 LRI mortality rate declined by 41·7% (35·9-46·9), from 56·5 deaths (51·3-61·9) to 32·9 deaths (29·9-35·4) per 100 000. From 2019 to 2021, during the COVID-19 pandemic and implementation of associated non-pharmaceutical interventions, we estimated a 16·0% (13·1-18·6) decline in the global all-age non-COVID-19 LRI mortality rate, largely accounted for by a 71·8% (63·8-78·9) decline in the number of influenza deaths and a 66·7% (56·6-75·3) decline in the number of RSV deaths. Interpretation: Substantial progress has been made in reducing LRI mortality, but the burden remains high, especially in low-income and middle-income countries. During the COVID-19 pandemic, with its associated non-pharmaceutical interventions, global incident LRI cases and mortality attributable to influenza and RSV declined substantially. Expanding access to health-care services and vaccines, including S pneumoniae, H influenzae type B, and novel RSV vaccines, along with new low-cost interventions against S aureus, could mitigate the LRI burden and prevent transmission of LRI-causing pathogens. Funding: Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, Wellcome Trust, and Department of Health and Social Care (UK).

The Lancet. Infectious diseases · systematic review · 388 citationsread the source →

Effectiveness of a brief lay counsellor-delivered, problem-solving intervention for adolescent mental health problems in urban, low-income schools in India: a randomised controlled trial.

Background: Mental health problems are a leading cause of disability in adolescents worldwide. Problem solving is a well-tested mental health intervention in many populations. We aimed to investigate the effectiveness of a brief, transdiagnostic problem-solving intervention for common adolescent mental health problems when delivered by non-specialist school counsellors in New Delhi, India. Methods: This randomised trial was done in six government-run schools (three all-boys schools, two all-girls schools, and one co-educational school) that serve low-income communities. We recruited participants from grades 9 to 12 (ages 12-20 years) by selecting students with persistently elevated mental health symptoms accompanied by distress or functional impairment. Clinical eligibility criteria were assessed by research assistants using the Hindi-language version of the Strengths and Difficulties Questionnaire (SDQ), with reference to locally validated borderline cutoff scores of 19 or greater for boys and 20 or greater for girls on the SDQ Total Difficulties scale, an abnormal score of 2 or more on the SDQ Impact scale, and persistence of more than 1 month on the SDQ Chronicity index. Participants were randomly allocated (1:1) to problem solving delivered through a brief (2-3 week) counsellor-led intervention with supporting printed materials (intervention group), or problem solving delivered via printed booklets alone (control group). Primary outcomes were adolescent-reported mental health symptoms (SDQ Total Difficulties scale) and idiographic psychosocial problems (Youth Top Problems [YTP]) at 6 weeks. Primary analyses were done on an intention-to-treat basis at the 6-week endpoint. The trial is registered with ClinicalTrials.gov, NCT03630471. Findings: Participants were enrolled between Aug 20, and Dec 4, 2018. 283 eligible adolescents were referred to the trial, and 251 (89%) of these were enrolled (mean age 15·61 years; 174 [69%] boys). 125 participants were allocated to each group (after accounting for one participant in the intervention group who withdrew consent after randomisation). Primary outcome data were available for 245 (98%) participants. At 6 weeks, the mean YTP scores were 3·52 (SD 2·66) in the intervention group and 4·60 (2·75) in the control group (adjusted mean difference -1·01, 95% CI -1·63 to -0·38; adjusted effect size 0·36, 95% CI 0·11 to 0·61; p=0·0015). The mean SDQ Total Difficulties scores were 17·48 (5·45) in the intervention group and 18·33 (5·45) in the control group (-0·86, -2·14 to 0·41; 0·16, -0·09 to 0·41; p=0·18). We observed no adverse events. Interpretation: A brief lay counsellor-delivered problem-solving intervention combined with printed booklets seemed to have a modest effect on psychosocial outcomes among adolescents with diverse mental health problems compared with problem-solving booklets alone. This counsellor-delivered intervention might be a suitable first-line intervention in a stepped care approach, which is being evaluated in ongoing studies. Funding: Wellcome Trust.

The Lancet. Child & adolescent health · randomised controlled trial · 69 citationsread the source →

Standardized Rehabilitation and Hospital Length of Stay Among Patients With Acute Respiratory Failure: A Randomized Clinical Trial.

Importance: Physical rehabilitation in the intensive care unit (ICU) may improve the outcomes of patients with acute respiratory failure. Objective: To compare standardized rehabilitation therapy (SRT) to usual ICU care in acute respiratory failure. Design, setting, and participants: Single-center, randomized clinical trial at Wake Forest Baptist Medical Center, North Carolina. Adult patients (mean age, 58 years; women, 55%) admitted to the ICU with acute respiratory failure requiring mechanical ventilation were randomized to SRT (n=150) or usual care (n=150) from October 2009 through May 2014 with 6-month follow-up. Interventions: Patients in the SRT group received daily therapy until hospital discharge, consisting of passive range of motion, physical therapy, and progressive resistance exercise. The usual care group received weekday physical therapy when ordered by the clinical team. For the SRT group, the median (interquartile range [IQR]) days of delivery of therapy were 8.0 (5.0-14.0) for passive range of motion, 5.0 (3.0-8.0) for physical therapy, and 3.0 (1.0-5.0) for progressive resistance exercise. The median days of delivery of physical therapy for the usual care group was 1.0 (IQR, 0.0-8.0). Main outcomes and measures: Both groups underwent assessor-blinded testing at ICU and hospital discharge and at 2, 4, and 6 months. The primary outcome was hospital length of stay (LOS). Secondary outcomes were ventilator days, ICU days, Short Physical Performance Battery (SPPB) score, 36-item Short-Form Health Surveys (SF-36) for physical and mental health and physical function scale score, Functional Performance Inventory (FPI) score, Mini-Mental State Examination (MMSE) score, and handgrip and handheld dynamometer strength. Results: Among 300 randomized patients, the median hospital LOS was 10 days (IQR, 6 to 17) for the SRT group and 10 days (IQR, 7 to 16) for the usual care group (median difference, 0 [95% CI, -1.5 to 3], P = .41). There was no difference in duration of ventilation or ICU care. There was no effect at 6 months for handgrip (difference, 2.0 kg [95% CI, -1.3 to 5.4], P = .23) and handheld dynamometer strength (difference, 0.4 lb [95% CI, -2.9 to 3.7], P = .82), SF-36 physical health score (difference, 3.4 [95% CI, -0.02 to 7.0], P = .05), SF-36 mental health score (difference, 2.4 [95% CI, -1.2 to 6.0], P = .19), or MMSE score (difference, 0.6 [95% CI, -0.2 to 1.4], P = .17). There were higher scores at 6 months in the SRT group for the SPPB score (difference, 1.1 [95% CI, 0.04 to 2.1, P = .04), SF-36 physical function scale score (difference, 12.2 [95% CI, 3.8 to 20.7], P = .001), and the FPI score (difference, 0.2 [95% CI, 0.04 to 0.4], P = .02). Conclusions and relevance: Among patients hospitalized with acute respiratory failure, SRT compared with usual care did not decrease hospital LOS. Trial registration: clinicaltrials.gov Identifier: NCT00976833.

JAMA · randomised controlled trial · 299 citationsread the source →

Prediction and prevention of schizophrenia: what has been achieved and where to go next?

Since the traditional clinical paradigm has been replaced by the modern molecular one, medicine set off into new directions. “Prediction”, “prevention” and “personalization” are the programmatic key words of this new approach. Like other medical disciplines, psychiatry has broadened its focus from diagnosis and treatment to the detection and estimation of the risk of disease development, the prediction of its onset and strategies to avoid its manifestation 1,2,3,4. Although treatment of schizophrenia has greatly advanced over the last decades, a significant number of patients continue to take an unfavorable chronic course 5,6. This makes schizophrenia the leading cause for permanent occupational disability among people under 40 years of age in Germany 7, and the 8th most common cause for disability adjusted life years (DALYs) lost among the 15 to 34-year olds worldwide 8, despite its low prevalence. Moreover, schizophrenia involves tremendous direct and indirect societal costs 9 and a huge burden on patients and their families 8,10. It is becoming increasingly clear that schizophrenia is a complex disorder with polygenic heredity and that its pathogenesis is greatly influenced by interactions between different genes and between genes and environment. Associations to variants of the genes for dysbindin and neuregulin-1, the genetic locus G72 and the DAOA (D-amino acid oxidase activator) gene have now been repeatedly confirmed. As with all other complex diseases, research is focusing now on characterizing the polygenetic predisposition and clarifying its influence on the development of the phenotype 11. Research methods range from molecular genetics via proteome research to cell biology, neurophysiology, brain structural and functional imaging and neuropsychology. With all these methods, several indicators for an increased risk of schizophrenia have been identified. However, the currently recognized neurobiological risk factors are not sufficiently predictive to allow the development and application of “selective” prevention measures targeting asymptomatic persons at risk. For neuro-psychological risk factors, this has just become evident in the large-scale attempt of the North American Prodrome Longitudinal Study (NAPLS) group to improve their multivariate model by integrating the examined neurocognitive variables 12. There are also established environmental risk factors for schizophrenia, such as pregnancy or birth complications, growing up in a large city, IQ low but normal and drug consumption. However, with odds ratios around 2, each of these factors appears to increase the lifetime risk of the disease only slightly 13. Thus, the currently known risk factors, either alone or taken together, cannot be used for prediction and prevention without knowledge of the complete predispositional basis and the gene-gene and gene-environment interactions, which are probably numerous. In view of this situation, it may be argued that the current efforts towards prediction and prevention are still premature and that further progress of etiological research is needed. However, a different perspective has emerged from the work of the centers for early recognition and prevention, established first in Melbourne, Australia and in Cologne, Germany in the mid 1990s, and later on in many other places around the world. This resulted from retrospective research of the early course of psychosis, in which the pathophysiologically active disturbances in brain development extend beyond early abnormalities in behavior into psychopathologically definable early risk and ultra high risk (UHR) symptoms, depending on the individual combination of stressors and resilience factors. First episode psychosis (FEP) research has shown that the outbreak of the disease is preceded in about 70% to nearly 100% of cases by an initial prodrome, which lasts for an average of five to six years. Even in highly developed health care systems, an average of one year thereafter elapses from the first manifestation of psychotic positive symptoms to the initiation of adequate treatment 14,15. The period over which the FEP remains untreated (duration of untreated psychosis, DUP) correlates with: delayed and incomplete remission of the symptoms; necessity of more protracted treatment and greater risk of relapse; lower compliance, greater burden on the family, and a higher level of “expressed emotion”; increased risk of depression and suicide; greater impact on the individual's employment or education; increased drug abuse and delinquent behavior; markedly increased costs of treatment 16. These correlations have recently been confirmed by a meta-analysis 17, with coefficients ranging from 0.285 to 0.434 (95% CI). This does not only provide strong arguments in favor of treating the FEP as early as possible, but has also led to a systematic effort to decrease the incidence of psychosis through indicated prevention. Two important studies concerning the early stage prior to the conversion to FEP have demonstrated that the earliest and most common symptoms, which generally dominate during the prodrome, are unspecific and cannot be distinguished from impairment in mood, drive, contact, and concentration of depressive episodes. These are the Age-Beginning-Course (ABC) study of schizophrenia, a retrospective study with optimized methods 14, and the Cologne Early Recognition (CER) Study, a long-term prospective study with an average follow-up period just below 10 years 18. These studies also found striking cognitive impairments in the form of self-experienced disturbances in thought, speech, and perception processes. This subgroup of so-called basic symptoms, which were found in more than a quarter of patients, had high specificity and a high positive predictive power, accompanied by only low rates of false positive predictions 19,20,21. Basic symptoms were first operationalized in the Bonn Scale for the Assessment of Basic Symptoms (BSABS). Shorter versions of the scale for adults and for children and adolescents — the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Adult version (SPI-A) and the Schizophrenia Proneness Instrument, Child and Youth version (SPI-CY) — were later developed from dimensional analyses 22,23,24. While the BSABS only allows an assessment of the current state, the SPI-A and the SPI-CY also allow severity ratings according to the maximum frequency of occurrence within the past 3 months. In the CER study, 385 patients who were presumably in the prodromal phase of schizophrenia were followed up for an average of 9.6 (±7.6) years past baseline. Twenty percent of the initial criterion-positive cases (1 of 66 basic symptoms) who agreed to be followed up developed schizophrenia after 12 months, a further 17% after 24 months, a further 13% after 36 months, and finally a total of 70% after an average of 4.5 years. Thus, only 30% did not convert to schizophrenia. The overall presence/absence of at least one basic symptom correctly predicted presence/absence of a subsequent transition to schizophrenia in 78.1% of cases. From further analyses, two partially overlapping basic symptom criteria for defining at risk mental states (ARMS) for psychosis, primarily schizophrenia, were developed (Table 1). The first criterion, which consists of ten cognitive-perceptive basic symptoms and is abbreviated as COPER, was based on findings concerning the predictive accuracy of individual basic symptoms 18,25. The second was based on a methodological re-analysis of the same data set, in which a cluster of nine cognitive basic symptoms had repeatedly been selected as the most predictive. This cluster was called “cognitive disturbances” (COGDIS). In terms of general predictive accuracy, the two criteria slightly differed in the CER study, as COGDIS tended to be more conservative than COPER, i.e. to perform better in ruling in subsequent schizophrenia at the cost of performing worse in ruling it out. The transition rate throughout the average follow-up period of roughly 10 years was 65% for COPER and 79% for COGDIS, with the majority of transitions occurring within the first 3 years past baseline. In a second prospective study 26, conducted with the SPI-A and with a systematic follow-up of 24 months, 38% of the initially included 146 at-risk subjects developed a frank psychosis, mainly schizophrenia, within 12.3 (±10.4) months on average (1–48; median=9) according to COPER. Thus, the positive results of the CER study were confirmed. Again, COGDIS appeared to be more specific but less sensitive than COPER. As a consequence of these findings, predictive basic symptoms have been established as a set of criteria for risk assessment in international research on the early recognition of psychosis. In particular, the German Research Network on Schizophrenia used these symptoms, together with a combined criterion of functional deterioration and biological risk, in defining an “early at-risk of psychosis state” (ERPS), thereby suggesting a clinical risk staging model (Figure 1). Early and late initial prodromal state: a clinical staging approach The positive symptoms typical of schizophrenia — such as delusions, hallucinations or formal thought disorders — often first appear in an attenuated or transient form during the initial prodromal phase. These symptoms provide a valid prediction of conversion into FEP, particularly in the short term. Warning signs of this sort have been used as ultra-high risk (UHR) criteria 27,28. Notwithstanding their differences across studies, these criteria are generally composed of three alternative elements: attenuated positive symptoms (APS), brief limited intermittent psychotic symptoms (BLIPS), or a combination of one or more risk factors (always including genetic risk) and functional decline within a certain recent period. For the ascertainment of the UHR criteria, the Melbourne group gradually developed a specific instrument, the Comprehensive Assessment of At Risk Mental States (CAARMS) 29. Based on the Australian definition of the UHR criteria, the Structured Interview for Prodromal Syndromes (SIPS), the Scale for Prodromal Syndromes (SOPS) and, subsequently, the Criteria of Prodromal Syndromes (COPS) were developed 30,31. Different UHR-related approaches to an early detection of FEP, particularly schizophrenia, were developed by the Hillside Recognition and Prevention (RAP) program in New York 32 and the Basel Früherkennung von Psychosen (FEPSY) study 33. There have been at least 15 prediction studies using UHR criteria, some of which with large samples 34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41. The 12-month rates of transition into FEP published so far range between approximately 13% and 50%. A substantial variance is even observed with comparable observation periods in the same center 34,35. Yet, as the annual incidence for all forms of psychosis in the general population is only about 0.034% 42, even the lowest conversion rates still indicate a dramatic increase in the relative risk of illness, at least in the help-seeking samples of specialized centers. Table 2 depicts the predictive accuracy measures published so far, with the last five listed studies representing secondary predictor analyses of samples meeting at risk criteria. As a result, in the German Research Network on Schizophrenia, the UHR approach was combined with the basic symptom approach and applied in a slightly modified form for the definition of “late at-risk of psychosis state” (LRPS) (Figure 1). This clinical staging model, which suggests a syndromal sequence for the development of FEP progressing from unspecific prodromal symptoms to predictive basic symptoms, and then to APS, to BLIPS and to full-blown psychotic symptoms, was recently strongly supported 15. Universal or selective prevention measures target healthy population groups or clinically still healthy risk carriers, respectively 43. Indicated prevention, instead, targets individuals with basic symptoms and UHR symptoms. Even at the early stages when these individuals seek advice and help at the early recognition and prevention centers, they must be regarded as ill and in need of treatment. Furthermore, the impending deterioration of psychosocial performance in schizophrenia often already occurs in the initial prodromal phase, even prior to the conversion into FEP 14,15. These clinical and psychosocial impairments justify defining the interventions in EPRS and LPRS as indicated prevention, pursuing the following three objectives: a) improvement in the current burden of prodromal symptoms; b) avoidance or perhaps delay in the development of psychosocial handicap; c) prevention of or at least delay or attenuation of psychosis. Five international intervention studies have attempted to find out whether or to what extent these three objectives can be reached 44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51 (Table 3). The preventive measures used were either cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), adapted to the requirements of the persons at risk, or atypical antipsychotics (risperidone, olanzapine, and amisulpride). These were randomized controlled studies, but there were problems with the blinding condition in the two CBT interventions. This and other methodological shortcomings currently limit conclusions and have encouraged the research groups working in this area to set up new, optimized intervention studies. For example, the protocol of the ongoing parallel group PREVENT study includes careful comparative analyses and superiority and inferiority tests of the psychological and pharmacological treatments 52. A staging of risk, thereby implying a temporal dimension, was considered for the first time in the two intervention studies of the German Research Network on Schizophrenia. One of these studies covered ERPS and only offered CBT as a preventive measure 49,50. The other study was designed for LRPS and used only preventive treatment with amisul-pride 51. When the symptom development in the initial prodromal state follows the sequence shown in Figure 1, it would be beneficial for scientific and especially ethical reasons to focus on psychological interventions in ERPS, which are well tolerated and highly accepted. As soon as the first attenuated or transient psychotic symptoms occur, it seems justifiable to apply well tolerated antipsychotics with few side effects. This differential prevention strategy is now pursued in all German early recognition centers and is also increasingly gaining support in other countries. Another pharmacological option is aripiprazole, tested in a pilot study in UHR states 53. Its possible preventive effects are currently being analyzed in the PREVENT study. Antidepressants were used in a naturalistic, non-randomized observational study of an adolescent sample employing only the APS criterion for inclusion, but, for methodological reasons, this study does not allow any conclusion about differential preventive effects of these medications 54. A critical evaluation of the achievements over the past 15 years through continuous efforts to enhance prediction and prevention of psychoses, particularly of schizophrenia, reveals quite impressive results. However, the results achieved thus far need to be evaluated in the light of the ambitious, initially mentioned objectives of modern predictive and preventive medicine. Once predictive basic symptoms and UHR symptoms have occurred, the underlying pathophysiological process might have already progressed. For such a complex disease with a long-term course and a pre-dispositional basis, this kind of risk identification and risk-oriented prevention may possibly come too late. A more substantial reduction in incidence could be reached with selective and universal prevention measures. Therefore, symptom-based prediction and prevention need to be further developed into the direction of selective prevention for symptom-free risk carriers. In the future, it is necessary to strive for: a) an improvement of risk enrichment with the inclusion of biological risk factors; b) a stronger individualization of the risk estimation by stratification; c) the inclusion of sub-psychotic mental states, as cross-sectionally by current at risk criteria, in the the application of prevention strategies more with the of the the initial prodromal phase for as as then most of the follow-up periods shown in Table 2 are not to the transition A significant number of later may be as and, the predictive of the risk may be 12. Therefore, the first and most important is to out new, optimized large-scale studies with follow-up periods the of the initial prodromal phase, as in the CER study 18. The risk enrichment can also be advanced through the inclusion of following the of recent research on the prediction of through the cognitive impairment This condition a risk for with a conversion rate comparable to the risk for the patients certain imaging and the predictive risk enrichment may be possible for using brain but also impairments of and which are with the psychosis risk and are more and in cases with a later transition to schizophrenia and other new large-scale studies with sufficiently observation periods could whether the risk enrichment can be achieved by of such The of this strategy is on the progress of research on biological and environmental risk factors and their interactions, as is currently attempted in the Network of schizophrenia study In other medical disciplines, such as or a risk which does not in a of is using for multivariate clinical staging by risk In the of study, this approach was into psychosis prediction research for the first time A clinical model was developed based on a including six variables positive disturbances Assessment of in the past and years of Based on the individual a multivariate for further the risk of transition to psychosis into risk was each a increased relative risk to the general with each This model was argued to improve the prediction of psychosis by a of the individual risk in terms of and a more risk estimation or clinical staging of risk, in studies, could the development of risk adapted inclusion criteria for randomized preventive In the first application of this approach in the only clinical and variables were It remains to be whether a model including or environmental variables would increase the predictive accuracy even In studies have to whether such can also be applied to the prediction of psychosis within different time The currently ongoing of the has a about the inclusion of a risk for psychosis in to prevention initially argued this and to the that the application of as criteria could that the high rate of predictions in would be to increase up to in general This is and prior to whether to the in the of the The on the predictive of at risk criteria, thereby the persons meeting at risk criteria already from mental and functional for which they seek Moreover, they psychological and cognitive with and functional the majority of help-seeking at risk persons general criteria for mental disorder a clinically significant behavioral or psychological with disability and have to be considered as i.e. as people with the need and to be these in there are reasons for the inclusion of a clinical in the as by current at risk criteria, not as a prodromal risk for first psychosis, but as an to medical the of such an diagnosis would have the of the by the current mental state to a and Although an increased risk of psychosis would continue to be a of such a the psychological and medical focus would be from an to and At this current state of the criteria would be the for the inclusion of this A for the and of a new of international and studies would be with this inclusion in and later on also in A new prevention approach is by the of and studies a of the onset of psychosis the with the first results are for and The transition rate was lower in an group of UHR adolescents than in a group and this was at a an was evaluated in 10 patients in an pilot and a significant improvement in different was In an study, time was in an UHR group with as with a group suggesting a of This was the first study imaging data on effects in individuals at risk. The preventive of is currently in the process of in the Australian Prodrome study With the of schizophrenia is the first mental disorder to which the prediction and prevention program of modern medicine has been The results are and justify the that in the years to come it be possible to provide preventive strategies to the individual risk of of each In to a reduction in risk assessment has to be by neurobiological and psychosocial risk factors, and indicated prevention has to be further developed towards selective prevention. This a new of large sample studies for prediction as well as prevention, with observation In these studies, of risk selected to predictive must be psychological and pharmacological interventions need to be on a long-term basis, more prevention strategies have to be In to be to and such studies, it would be to mental states, as by the currently used risk symptoms, in the of the

World Psychiatry · 127 citationsread the source →

Effects of a palliative care intervention on clinical outcomes in patients with advanced cancer: the Project ENABLE II randomized controlled trial.

Context: There are few randomized controlled trials on the effectiveness of palliative care interventions to improve the care of patients with advanced cancer. Objective: To determine the effect of a nursing-led intervention on quality of life, symptom intensity, mood, and resource use in patients with advanced cancer. Design, setting, and participants: Randomized controlled trial conducted from November 2003 through May 2008 of 322 patients with advanced cancer in a rural, National Cancer Institute-designated comprehensive cancer center in New Hampshire and affiliated outreach clinics and a VA medical center in Vermont. Interventions: A multicomponent, psychoeducational intervention (Project ENABLE [Educate, Nurture, Advise, Before Life Ends]) conducted by advanced practice nurses consisting of 4 weekly educational sessions and monthly follow-up sessions until death or study completion (n = 161) vs usual care (n = 161). Main outcome measures: Quality of life was measured by the Functional Assessment of Chronic Illness Therapy for Palliative Care (score range, 0-184). Symptom intensity was measured by the Edmonton Symptom Assessment Scale (score range, 0-900). Mood was measured by the Center for Epidemiological Studies Depression Scale (range, 0-60). These measures were assessed at baseline, 1 month, and every 3 months until death or study completion. Intensity of service was measured as the number of days in the hospital and in the intensive care unit (ICU) and the number of emergency department visits recorded in the electronic medical record. Results: A total of 322 participants with cancer of the gastrointestinal tract (41%; 67 in the usual care group vs 66 in the intervention group), lung (36%; 58 vs 59), genitourinary tract (12%; 20 vs 19), and breast (10%; 16 vs 17) were randomized. The estimated treatment effects (intervention minus usual care) for all participants were a mean (SE) of 4.6 (2) for quality of life (P = .02), -27.8 (15) for symptom intensity (P = .06), and -1.8 (0.81) for depressed mood (P = .02). The estimated treatment effects in participants who died during the study were a mean (SE) of 8.6 (3.6) for quality of life (P = .02), -24.2 (20.5) for symptom intensity (P = .24), and -2.7 (1.2) for depressed mood (P = .03). Intensity of service did not differ between the 2 groups. Conclusion: Compared with participants receiving usual oncology care, those receiving a nurse-led, palliative care-focused intervention addressing physical, psychosocial, and care coordination provided concurrently with oncology care had higher scores for quality of life and mood, but did not have improvements in symptom intensity scores or reduced days in the hospital or ICU or emergency department visits. Trial registration: clinicaltrials.gov Identifier: NCT00253383.

JAMA · randomised controlled trial · 1314 citationsread the source →

An interdisciplinary meta-analysis of the potential antecedents, correlates, and consequences of protégé perceptions of mentoring.

This meta-analysis summarized youth, academic, and workplace research on the potential antecedents (demographics, human capital, and relationship attributes), correlates (interaction frequency, relationship length, performance, motivation, and social capital), and consequences (attitudinal, behavioral, career-related, and health-related outcomes) of protégé perceptions of instrumental support, psychosocial support, and relationship quality to the mentor or to the relationship. A total of 173 meta-analytic correlations were computed based on data from 173 samples and a combined N of 40,737. Among antecedents, positive protégé perceptions were most strongly associated with greater similarity in attitudes, values, beliefs, and personality with their mentors (ρ ranged from .38 to .59). Among correlates, protégé perceptions of greater instrumental support (ρ = .35) and relationship quality (ρ = .54) were most strongly associated with social capital while protégé perceptions of greater psychosocial support were most strongly associated with interaction frequency (ρ = .25). Among consequences, protégé perceptions of greater instrumental support (ρ = .36) and relationship quality (ρ = .38) were most strongly associated with situational satisfaction while protégé perceptions of psychosocial support were most highly associated with sense of affiliation (ρ = .41). Comparisons between academic and workplace mentoring generally revealed differences in magnitude, rather than direction, of the obtained effects. The results should be interpreted in light of the methodological limitations (primarily cross-sectional designs and single-source data) and, in some instances, a small number of primary studies.

Psychological bulletin · meta-analysis · 126 citationsread the source →

The Social Epidemiology of Human Immunodeficiency Virus/Acquired Immunodeficiency Syndrome

Social epidemiology is defined as the study of the distribution of health outcomes and their social determinants (1). It builds on the classic epidemiologic triangle of host, agent, and environment to focus explicitly on the role of social determinants in infectious disease transmission and progression. These determinants are the “features of and pathways by which societal conditions affect health” (2, p. 697). Early studies of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS) focused on individual characteristics and behaviors in determining HIV risk, an approach that Fee and Krieger (3) refer to as “biomedical individualism.” Biomedical individualism is the basis of risk factor epidemiology; by contrast, the social epidemiology perspective emphasizes social conditions as fundamental causes of disease (4) (table 1). Social epidemiologists examine how persons become exposed to risk or protective factors and under what social conditions individual risk factors are related to disease. Social factors are thus the focus of analysis and are not simply adjusted for as potentially confounding factors or used as proxies for unavailable individual-level data. Social factors are indeed critical to understanding nonuniform infectious disease patterns that emerge as a result of the dependent nature of disease transmission or the idea that an outcome in one person is dependent upon outcomes and exposures in others (5, 6). Contact patterns that enhance HIV/AIDS vulnerability may be conceptualized at multiple levels. Figure 1 distinguishes determinants of HIV/AIDS at three levels: individual, social, and structural. Individual factors include biologic, demographic, and behavioral risk factors that may influence the risk of HIV acquisition and disease progression. Social-level factors include critical pathways by which community and network structures link persons to society. These structures are central to understanding the diffusion and differential distribution of HIV/AIDS in population subgroups. Structural-level factors include social and economic factors, as well as laws and policies. These factors, in turn, affect HIV transmission dynamics and the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS. Infectious disease epidemiology provides models of the mechanisms through which social determinants affect HIV transmission (7). For example, the basic reproductive number of an infectious disease, R0 (8), describes secondary infections that arise from a primary infection. In the equation R0 = βCD, β is the probability of infection per contact, C is the number of contacts, and D is the duration of infectivity. The goal of intervention efforts is to reduce the empirical value of these terms by modifying the social conditions under which individual risk factors lead to disease. Examples of factors that affect the component terms of R0 in HIV epidemiology are presented in table 2. In this review, we present existing evidence linking social and structural determinants to HIV/AIDS. In addition, we discuss the implications of these findings for future social epidemiology research on HIV/AIDS as well as the design of more effective HIV/AIDS interventions. We searched the published literature to identify conceptual and empirical research reports on the social epidemiology of HIV/AIDS. Five databases were searched: PsycINFO (American Psychological Association, Washington, DC), PubMed (MEDLINE; National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Maryland), Social Science Citation Index (Web of Science; Thomson ISI, Stamford, Connecticut), Sociological Abstracts (CSA, Bethesda, Maryland), and Digital Dissertations (ProQuest; UMI, Ann Arbor, Michigan). Searches were designed to include the factors we specified in our framework as social or structural factors (figure 1). Searches were limited to published articles in the English language for the period 1981–2003. The following keywords were included in each search: AIDS/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome, HIV, and epidemiol*. Additional searches were conducted by using combinations of keywords listed in Appendix table 1 corresponding with our framework. We identified four categories of social-level factors of importance to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: cultural context, social networks, neighborhood effects, and social capital. Each uses different conceptual and methodological approaches to examine the effects of social forces on population HIV/AIDS vulnerability. Anthropologist Edward Tylor defined culture as “that complex whole which includes knowledge, belief, art, law, morals, custom, and any other capabilities and habits acquired by man as a member of society” (9, p. 1). Anthropologic and epidemiologic approaches may be integrated in a variety of ways to identify features of the social environment that affect HIV/AIDS risk. One way to explore how the social environment affects HIV/AIDS epidemiology is through the use of mixed research methods. Mixed-methods study designs integrate qualitative and quantitative research methods either sequentially or concurrently (10). In sequential study designs, qualitative methods may be used to explore a topic under study or to explain quantitative epidemiologic findings. Concurrent study designs are meant to confirm, cross-validate, or corroborate findings within a single study. A common type of concurrent mixed methods study is “triangulation,” and this approach has been used extensively in rapid assessments of illicit drug use and HIV/AIDS (11–13). Mixed methods approaches are particularly well suited to the investigation of the often hidden and stigmatizing behavioral and social factors underlying HIV epidemics. One exemplary study combining qualitative methods with quantitative methods was conducted by Beyrer et al. (14) to examine the role of overland heroin trafficking routes in shaping explosive HIV/AIDS epidemics among injection drug users in Southeast Asia. Piecing together data from a variety of sources, including existing epidemiologic data, key informant interviews, and laboratory data, this study revealed that distinct HIV subtypes emerged and recombined along drug trafficking routes originating in Myanmar, one of the world’s largest heroin producers. Along these trafficking routes, communities of injection drug users formed, facilitating the spread of HIV into local communities in Laos, Thailand, Vietnam, India, and China (refer, for example, to Panda et al. (15)). This illustration highlights the broader understanding of HIV/AIDS epidemiology that can be achieved by examining the interplay between contextual factors and social and behavioral factors. Investigation of social networks in HIV/AIDS began with the mapping of relationships between one of the first identified AIDS cases, an airline steward, and a large number of his male sex partners in the early 1980s (16). Social network analysis generates measures of the quality, density, position, and structure of relationships between persons, including dyads (partnerships), personal networks (“egocentric” networks), and larger communities (“sociometric” networks) (17, 18). Social networks can influence health outcomes in direct and indirect ways, including 1) social influence, 2) social engagement and participation, 3) prevalence of infectious disease and network member mixing, 4) access to material goods and informational resources, and 5) social support (19). Researchers have demonstrated that patterns in the structure of relationships—rather than differences in individual risk behaviors alone—explain observed HIV patterns (20, 21). The theoretical foundation for examining social networks in HIV research is closely tied to advances in sexually transmitted disease (STD) epidemiology. A key concept from STD epidemiology is the notion of the “core group,” a small group of disease transmitters responsible for a large proportion of cases (22). Friedman et al. (23) found that individuals’ locations within sociometric risk networks were associated with HIV risk among a group of injection drug users in New York City. Other concepts from STD epidemiology, such as partner concurrency, bridging, and mixing patterns, are also important in understanding HIV risk (24–29). Specific network characteristics that have been associated with HIV/AIDS include the size of subgroups and their distribution in a network (23), the centrality of HIV-positive persons within networks (30), partner selection patterns (24, 31–33), and concurrent sexual partnerships (28). Inclusion of these variables has been shown to improve transmission estimates in mathematical modeling (34, 35). Social and normative influences have also been associated with individual HIV risks (36, 37). Network-related social and normative influences are predictive of illicit drug use (38) and condom use behavior (37, 39), highlighting the importance of network-based interventions for HIV prevention (18). Kelly et al. (40, 41) developed a popular opinion leader model that has been effective in reducing HIV risk in several populations, including men who have sex with men and women in low-income housing (42). The success of this model has led to its adaption for international use by the National Institute of Mental Health Collaborative HIV/STD Prevention Trial in China, India, Peru, Russia, and Zimbabwe. Neighborhoods represent the intersection of social networks and physical spatial locations, a confluence Wallace (43) has called the “sociogeographic networks” through which infectious diseases spread. Early interest in the role of neighborhood social environment in disease transmission was sparked by a study in Colorado Springs, Colorado, in which researchers found that gonorrhea was highly focused geographically in core residential neighborhoods (44). Both direct and indirect mechanisms may determine how neighborhood-level factors shape population HIV/AIDS patterns. Direct mechanisms are those that increase the likelihood of a person coming into contact with someone who is HIV positive, for example, through residential segregation and the social isolation of marginalized populations. Indirect mechanisms include those that increase population vulnerability to HIV/AIDS, such as exposure to poor socioeconomic conditions, high unemployment, or the proliferation of illicit drug markets. A range of neighborhood-level factors have been examined in relation to infectious disease, including poverty and income (45, 46), residential segregation (47), and neighborhood physical environment (48, 49). Current research in neighborhood and area effects on health emphasizes the importance of moving beyond documentation of associations to analyze the social and epidemiologic mechanisms through which neighborhood effects might operate (50–54). Increasing concentrations of affluence and poverty are contributing to what demographer Douglas Massey has called “a radical change in the geographic basis of human society” (55, p. 395). Powerful social and economic forces in US cities are increasing neighborhood segregation by class and race/ethnicity (56, 57). Resulting social disorganization and loss of resources and services in poor neighborhoods are in turn shaping HIV/AIDS patterns at the neighborhood level. In a number of studies in New York City, for example, Wallace (58–63) has examined the complex interplay of public policies such as “planned shrinkage” with HIV epidemic dynamics in the Bronx, documenting the “synergy of plagues” that has accompanied rapid social change and the destruction of essential protective networks in poor communities. Using AIDS surveillance data, ecologic studies conducted in various US cities have also consistently found significant associations between income and poverty measures and neighborhood-level AIDS incidence and prevalence rates, and these findings have been consistent across census block groups (46), census tracts (64), and zip codes (65, 66). Length of survival an AIDS has also been with neighborhood measures of income and the of highly a of health at the population may also a role in shaping HIV/AIDS patterns, associations between HIV/AIDS and income at the neighborhood have not been well segregation by race/ethnicity is neighborhood-level that may an important role in HIV/AIDS may affect infectious disease patterns through the and isolation of persons in one increasing the probability of transmission within that For example, found that measures of residential isolation were protective for at risk of disease. Indirect effects of segregation are associated with of neighborhood and with for those in poor neighborhoods segregation may to understanding disease we of studies examining neighborhood segregation in relation to HIV/AIDS that have been The physical environment of neighborhoods has also been examined in relation to infectious disease. et al. examined gonorrhea and neighborhood physical environment in New by using an of physical to explore and to this the of physical such as and a in social in a of community this concept to public et al. found a significant between neighborhood physical and gonorrhea rates, a by a ecologic study of US physical environment may HIV risk by illicit drug use such as injection behaviors and of the mechanisms through which the observed associations may be and associations between the physical environment and HIV/AIDS is research is to support the design of neighborhood-level HIV/AIDS interventions. has differences are not result from social and economic by policies. are and to p. The of evidence ecologic associations between neighborhood-level factors and infectious disease that to be to identify of and defined social as of social structures that that is the of that in its not be p. Social may affect health through 1) the of 2) access to services and 3) of in a and 4) participation, to policies that are more to published studies have explicitly examined social in the of HIV/AIDS. In the and examined income and social as of STD and AIDS found social to be the of STD and AIDS In et al. examined one of social participation, as a for understanding community influences on HIV infection. found that in of and was in other social groups groups with high of social HIV risk. findings from these studies are and We identified categories of factors to HIV/AIDS epidemiology: structural and the and and Each is in the that highlights a of by often and forces that through as is more the the of p. is in patterns of on sexual and HIV A of how structural might influence HIV/AIDS risk is presented in 2. The and uses of race/ethnicity in epidemiologic research have been the of analysis and Social epidemiologists race/ethnicity as an of social forces than physical has that race/ethnicity is a for exposure to which may be defined as the and individual that and of p. The study of disease is of central importance in the study of HIV/AIDS In the for example, the of HIV HIV/AIDS and of also high HIV/AIDS with of behavioral risk factors at the individual have not observed HIV/AIDS or STD by race/ethnicity individual pathways by which HIV/AIDS in a group complex of economic and social patterns, of illicit and health Social epidemiology is and evidence as to what factors and these HIV/AIDS and found that sexual networks for in sexually transmitted infection in the National Health and Social et al. found that risk network structure in a of injection drug users in differences in HIV prevalence between and and structural factors key in shaping the patterns that to HIV/AIDS For example, the effects of sex from the of men may be relationships and sexual segregation by race/ethnicity also to shape social and risk networks in ways that to disease patterns. residential segregation was and associated with gonorrhea at the in the patterns might be observed for HIV/AIDS. is in the proportion of women among HIV/AIDS cases the for of HIV-positive in through and for of HIV-positive in HIV infections in women are at an and women are and more to HIV infection. theoretical for understanding in HIV/AIDS have been including and human beyond as a risk these approaches structural for in HIV/AIDS. focus has been on women in the of sex or transmission women HIV from their partner and reducing acquisition of HIV among men is key to reducing the spread of HIV to women the of and and than their male partners upon of HIV-positive in of of and HIV risks by women The effects of include individual to HIV and a of to HIV prevention The for and Prevention estimates that one of those with HIV not their HIV and have central in shaping to HIV/AIDS the effects of these social forces on the differential distribution of HIV/AIDS have not been well has been examined at the individual in studies of and and to of and in a that the of to p. et al. have defined as and that are at to have AIDS or HIV and at the and communities with which these are p. and have that a conceptual framework for understanding is our of and to as social that can be in relation to broader of and p. in et al. that HIV transmission and with AIDS the of or structural interventions change the in which and communities HIV infection The effective have been those in which communities have to and by increasing community of HIV Social interventions to and to affect community The for this is found in diffusion which on social networks, opinion and change these are by cultural through the in social networks within communities are essential for and behavior change to to HIV/AIDS structures refer to as well as to the and with their and et al. that laws can affect health in 1) may be a through which social determinants affect health direct and 2) may to social conditions associated with health outcomes indirect of direct effects of on HIV risk are on access to injection which have been associated with HIV incidence of an indirect of structures is the of laws on income which may social conditions that increase HIV vulnerability. key social determinants of HIV/AIDS, including poverty and income and community social change may affect HIV/AIDS patterns through population and and the and structures of Each of these factors may be as modifying between and persons in populations. the HIV infection than populations, of HIV prevalence in the or and may affect HIV transmission studies of have into 1) studies of the spread of HIV along and 2) studies of the that vulnerability to HIV/AIDS can the spread of HIV subtypes and to patterns of and evidence linking patterns and Beyrer et al. (14) found that distinct HIV subtypes were associated with different illicit drug trafficking routes in Southeast Asia. has to the spread of HIV in India, and In addition, studies have identified the importance of in the of for HIV/AIDS is a classic of an health have examined the role of in population HIV/AIDS patterns that might for the effects of on HIV/AIDS patterns include sexual and drug use patterns to in patterns, and of and persons, and on the health sex that men have also been associated with high HIV/AIDS prevalence at the This ecologic is to be by the effects of cultural at the local of the effects might have on and network patterns. the of resources in the public and and the environment a central role in the and of HIV/AIDS epidemics. of importance to HIV/AIDS include health social and illicit drug HIV/AIDS is a high on the health of and policies are to be contributing to increasing HIV/AIDS The complex and between policies and HIV/AIDS are to be policies affect health and by poverty in the distribution of and health have that structural designed to and in have a on the HIV/AIDS by increasing and and reducing in the health and social services as to how policies can be designed to to in HIV/AIDS Structural-level health policies and can to in HIV/AIDS HIV prevention have on individual behavior the of the HIV prevention is with of the for that the social and economic of HIV/AIDS The condom is an exemplary of an effective structural HIV prevention to the environment in which HIV risk behaviors the of may also affect in HIV/AIDS transmission by reducing among HIV-positive Social policies a critical role in the of those to HIV/AIDS, such as or Social policies such as and public affect access to resources and can also affect HIV transmission and access to quantitative research has social change to population health outcomes qualitative research has the importance of social in shaping risk In for example, et al. the effects of the and of which Social and Social on the basis of drug and in this study into the drug of income of and in behaviors in an to HIV to studies of the associations between social policies and HIV/AIDS are to the human of policies of with the of those to HIV/AIDS and to identify drug also has a significant on HIV/AIDS. drug particularly of is HIV epidemics in the The on has focused on to the of which of prevention and measures policies for those trafficking or illicit have in of persons for drug The direct of patterns to be For example, et al. found that on policies such as the of and of those with use from Social were associated with in is a risk factor for HIV risk behaviors have been shown to associated with of and HIV risk of in have access to can increase HIV/AIDS risk and by social and risk networks, or and increasing poverty and social in in risk behaviors in of have been For example, et al. found that the in was associated with among injection drug users in of the of heroin trafficking from In the of the of has also been associated with HIV/AIDS forces are often and of men from In a study for the found that a in the size of the from to as a proportion of population reduce HIV among by 1 to the of in are to reduce HIV in with HIV/AIDS prevention and for The of social epidemiology to the HIV/AIDS have in This is in to a that from a that risk factors for disease to one that the that patterns of disease in p. and methodological in the have this our understanding of multiple causes of risk in modeling geographic and databases linking public health data with on social factors enhance our to and in ways that more closely the of HIV/AIDS epidemics. social epidemiology research in HIV/AIDS determine how we can design more effective of interventions at multiple of social A number of key which of the larger social environment in HIV/AIDS transmission and disease are model complex and be has these include data variables and of analysis at multiple contextual effects, and complex with and p. approaches are for the effective of social-level interventions. persons are with HIV/AIDS, and an HIV infections in effective are high drug and in are to of an HIV more These the to underlying social and structural determinants of HIV/AIDS through policies and This was by from the National Institute on The of the New York of for for and A framework for the social epidemiology of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome The the the nature of the between of In are between factors at that to observed epidemic patterns. sexually transmitted infection. 2. through which various of structural might influence the risk of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)/acquired immunodeficiency syndrome of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger of how epidemiology is examined by using different research HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency In this a is between three approaches to social epidemiology: a a social of disease and an This table is on by Krieger terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency terms in the equation for the basic reproductive and factors that affect the empirical estimates of the terms in the of HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency keywords used to databases for published literature on the social epidemiology of of Bethesda, HIV, human immunodeficiency acquired immunodeficiency

Epidemiologic Reviews · meta-analysis · 394 citationsread the source →

Waitlist-controlled trial of cognitive behavior therapy for hoarding disorder.

Objective: This study investigated a multicomponent cognitive behavioral treatment (CBT) for hoarding based on a model proposed by Frost and colleagues and manualized in Steketee and Frost (2007). Method: Participants with clinically significant hoarding were recruited from the community and a university-based anxiety clinic. Of the 46 patients randomly assigned to CBT or waitlist (WL), 40 completed the 12-week assessment and 36 completed 26 sessions. Treatment included education and case formulation, motivational interviewing, skills training for organizing and problem solving, direct exposure to nonacquiring and discarding, and cognitive therapy. Measures included the Saving Inventory-Revised (self-report), Hoarding Rating Scale-Interview, and measures of clinical global improvement. Between group repeated measures analyses using general linear modeling examined the effect of CBT versus WL on hoarding symptoms and moodstate after 12 weeks. Within group analyses examined pre-post effects for all CBT participants combined after 26 sessions. Results: After 12 weeks, CBT participants benefited significantly more than WL patients on hoarding severity and mood with moderate effect sizes. After 26 sessions of CBT, participants showed significant reductions in hoarding symptoms with large effect sizes for most measures. At session 26, 71% of patients were considered improved on therapist clinical global improvement ratings and 81% of patients rated themselves improved; 41% of completers were clinically significantly improved. Conclusions: Multicomponent CBT was effective in treating hoarding. However, treatment refusal and compliance remain a concern, and further research with independent assessors is needed to establish treatment benefits and durability of gains.

Depression and anxiety · randomised controlled trial · 112 citationsread the source →

Naturopathic care for anxiety: a randomized controlled trial ISRCTN78958974.

Background: Anxiety is a serious personal health condition and represents a substantial burden to overall quality of life. Additionally anxiety disorders represent a significant cost to the health care system as well as employers through benefits coverage and days missed due to incapacity. This study sought to explore the effectiveness of naturopathic care on anxiety symptoms using a randomized trial. Methods: Employees with moderate to severe anxiety of longer than 6 weeks duration were randomized based on age and gender to receive naturopathic care (NC) (n = 41) or standardized psychotherapy intervention (PT) (n = 40) over a period of 12 weeks. Blinding of investigators and participants during randomization and allocation was maintained. Participants in the NC group received dietary counseling, deep breathing relaxation techniques, a standard multi-vitamin, and the herbal medicine, ashwagandha (Withania somnifera) (300 mg b.i.d. standardized to 1.5% with anolides, prepared from root). The PT intervention received psychotherapy, and matched deep breathing relaxation techniques, and placebo. The primary outcome measure was the Beck Anxiety Inventory (BAI) and secondary outcome measures included the Short Form 36 (SF-36), Fatigue Symptom Inventory (FSI), and Measure Yourself Medical Outcomes Profile (MY-MOP) to measure anxiety, mental health, and quality of life respectively. Participants were blinded to the placebo-controlled intervention. Results: Seventy-five participants (93%) were followed for 8 or more weeks on the trial. Final BAI scores decreased by 56.5% (p<0.0001) in the NC group and 30.5% (p<0.0001) in the PT group. BAI group scores were significantly decreased in the NC group compared to PT group (p = 0.003). Significant differences between groups were also observed in mental health, concentration, fatigue, social functioning, vitality, and overall quality of life with the NC group exhibiting greater clinical benefit. No serious adverse reactions were observed in either group. Relevance: Many patients seek alternatives and/or complementary care to conventional anxiety treatments. To date, no study has evaluated the potential of a naturopathic treatment protocol to effectively treat anxiety. Knowledge of the efficacy, safety or risk of natural health products, and naturopathic treatments is important for physicians and the public in order to make informed decisions. Interpretation: Both NC and PT led to significant improvements in patients' anxiety. Group comparison demonstrated a significant decrease in anxiety levels in the NC group over the PT group. Significant improvements in secondary quality of life measures were also observed in the NC group as compared to PT. The whole system of naturopathic care for anxiety needs to be investigated further including a closer examination of the individual components within the context of their additive effect. Trial registration: Controlled-Trials.com ISRCTN78958974.

PloS one · randomised controlled trial · 50 citationsread the source →

Quality of Life in Rectal Cancer Patients After Chemoradiation: Watch-and-Wait Policy Versus Standard Resection - A Matched-Controlled Study.

Background: Fifteen to twenty percent of patients with locally advanced rectal cancer have a clinical complete response after chemoradiation therapy. These patients can be offered nonoperative organ-preserving treatment, the so-called watch-and-wait policy. The main goal of this watch-and-wait policy is an anticipated improved quality of life and functional outcome in comparison with a total mesorectal excision, while maintaining a good oncological outcome. Objective: The aim of this study was to compare the quality of life of watch-and-wait patients with a matched-controlled group of patients who underwent chemoradiation and surgery (total mesorectal excision group). Design: This was a matched controlled study. Settings: This study was conducted at multiple centers. Patients: The study population consisted of 2 groups: 41 patients after a watch-and-wait policy and 41 matched patients after chemoradiation and surgery. Patients were matched on sex, age, tumor stage, and tumor height. All patients were disease free at the moment of recruitment after a minimal follow-up of 2 years. Main outcome measures: Quality of life was measured by validated questionnaires covering general quality of life (Short Form 36, European Organization for Research and Treatment of Cancer QLQ-C30), disease-specific total mesorectal excision (European Organization for Research and Treatment of Cancer QLQ-CR38), defecation problems (Vaizey and low anterior resection syndrome scores), sexual problems (International Index of Erectile Function and Female Sexual Function Index), and urinary dysfunction (International Prostate Symptom Score). Results: The watch-and-wait group showed better physical and cognitive function, better physical and emotional roles, and better global health status compared with the total mesorectal excision group. The watch-and-wait patients showed fewer problems with defecation and sexual and urinary tract function. Limitations: This study only focused on watch-and-wait patients who achieved a sustained complete response for 2 years. In addition, this is a study with a limited number of patients and with quality-of-life measurements on nonpredefined and variable intervals after surgery. Conclusions: After a successful watch-and-wait approach, the quality of life was better than after chemoradiation and surgery on several domains. However, chemoradiation therapy on its own is not without long-term side effects, because one-third of the watch-and-wait patients experienced major low anterior resection syndrome symptoms, compared with 66.7% of the patients in the total mesorectal excision group. See Video Abstract at http://links.lww.com/DCR/A395.

Diseases of the colon and rectum · cohort or longitudinal · 174 citationsread the source →

Evaluating Long-term Outcomes of NHS Stop Smoking Services (ELONS): a prospective cohort study.

Background: NHS Stop Smoking Services (SSSs) provide free at the point of use treatment for smokers who would like to stop. Since their inception in 1999 they have evolved to offer a variety of support options. Given the changes that have happened in the provision of services and the ongoing need for evidence on effectiveness, the Evaluating Long-term Outcomes for NHS Stop Smoking Services (ELONS) study was commissioned. Objectives: The main aim of the study was to explore the factors that determine longer-term abstinence from smoking following intervention by SSSs. There were also a number of additional objectives. Design: The ELONS study was an observational study with two main stages: secondary analysis of routine data collected by SSSs and a prospective cohort study of service clients. The prospective study had additional elements on client satisfaction, well-being and longer-term nicotine replacement therapy (NRT) use. Setting: The setting for the study was SSSs in England. For the secondary analysis, routine data from 49 services were obtained. For the prospective study and its added elements, nine services were involved. The target population was clients of these services. Participants: There were 202,804 cases included in secondary analysis and 3075 in the prospective study. Interventions: A combination of behavioural support and stop smoking medication delivered by SSS practitioners. Main outcome measures: Abstinence from smoking at 4 and 52 weeks after setting a quit date, validated by a carbon monoxide (CO) breath test. Results: Just over 4 in 10 smokers (41%) recruited to the prospective study were biochemically validated as abstinent from smoking at 4 weeks (which was broadly comparable with findings from the secondary analysis of routine service data, where self-reported 4-week quit rates were 48%, falling to 34% when biochemical validation had occurred). At the 1-year follow-up, 8% of prospective study clients were CO validated as abstinent from smoking. Clients who received specialist one-to-one behavioural support were twice as likely to have remained abstinent than those who were seen by a general practitioner (GP) practice and pharmacy providers [odds ratio (OR) 2.3, 95% confidence interval (CI) 1.2 to 4.6]. Clients who received group behavioural support (either closed or rolling groups) were three times more likely to stop smoking than those who were seen by a GP practice or pharmacy providers (OR 3.4, 95% CI 1.7 to 6.7). Satisfaction with services was high and well-being at baseline was found to be a predictor of abstinence from smoking at longer-term follow-up. Continued use of NRT at 1 year was rare, but no evidence of harm from longer-term use was identified from the data collected. Conclusions: Stop Smoking Services in England are effective in helping smokers to move away from tobacco use. Using the 52-week CO-validated quit rate of 8% found in this study, we estimate that in the year 2012-13 the services supported 36,249 clients to become non-smokers for the remainder of their lives. This is a substantial figure and provides one indicator of the ongoing value of the treatment that the services provide. The study raises a number of issues for future research including (1) examining the role of electronic cigarettes (e-cigarettes) in smoking cessation for service clients [this study did not look at e-cigarette use (except briefly in the longer-term NRT study) but this is a priority for future studies]; (2) more detailed comparisons of rolling groups with other forms of behavioural support; (3) further exploration of the role of practitioner knowledge, skills and use of effective behaviour change techniques in supporting service clients to stop smoking; (4) surveillance of the impact of structural and funding changes on the future development and sustainability of SSSs; and (5) more detailed analysis of well-being over time between those who successfully stop smoking and those who relapse. Further research on longer-term use of non-combustible nicotine products that measures a wider array of biomarkers of smoking-related harm such as lung function tests or carcinogen metabolites. Funding: The National Institute for Health Research Health Technology Assessment programme. The UK Centre for Tobacco and Alcohol Studies provided funding for the longer-term NRT study.

Health technology assessment (Winchester, England) · cohort or longitudinal · 52 citationsread the source →

The adult respiratory distress syndrome cognitive outcomes study: long-term neuropsychological function in survivors of acute lung injury.

Rationale: Cognitive and psychiatric morbidity is common and potentially modifiable after acute lung injury (ALI). However, practical measures of neuropsychological function for use in multicenter trials are lacking. Objectives: To determine whether a validated telephone-based neuropsychological test battery is feasible in a multicenter trial. To determine the frequency and risk factors for long-term neuropsychological impairment. Methods: As an adjunct study to the Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome Clinical Trials Network Fluid and Catheter Treatment Trial, we assessed neuropsychological function at 2 and 12 months post-hospital discharge. Measurements and main results: Of 406 eligible survivors, we approached 261 to participate and 213 consented. We tested 122 subjects at least once, including 102 subjects at 12 months. Memory, verbal fluency, and executive function were impaired in 13% (12 of 92), 16% (15 of 96), and 49% (37 of 76) of long-term survivors. Long-term cognitive impairment was present in 41 of the 75 (55%) survivors who completed cognitive testing. Depression, post-traumatic stress disorder, or anxiety was present in 36% (37 of 102), 39% (40 of 102), and 62% (63 of 102) of long-term survivors. Enrollment in a conservative fluid-management strategy (P = 0.005) was associated with cognitive impairment and lower partial pressure of arterial oxygen during the trial was associated with cognitive (P = 0.02) and psychiatric impairment (P = 0.02). Conclusions: Neuropsychological function can be assessed by telephone in a multicenter trial. Long-term neuropsychological impairment is common in survivors of ALI. Hypoxemia is a risk factor for long-term neuropsychological impairment. Fluid management strategy is a potential risk factor for long-term cognitive impairment; however, given the select population studied and an unclear mechanism, this finding requires confirmation.

American journal of respiratory and critical care medicine · clinical trial · 434 citationsread the source →

Health outcomes in people 2 years after surviving hospitalisation with COVID-19: a longitudinal cohort study.

Background: With the ongoing COVID-19 pandemic, growing evidence shows that a considerable proportion of people who have recovered from COVID-19 have long-term effects on multiple organs and systems. A few longitudinal studies have reported on the persistent health effects of COVID-19, but the follow-up was limited to 1 year after acute infection. The aim of our study was to characterise the longitudinal evolution of health outcomes in hospital survivors with different initial disease severity throughout 2 years after acute COVID-19 infection and to determine their recovery status. Methods: We did an ambidirectional, longitudinal cohort study of individuals who had survived hospitalisation with COVID-19 and who had been discharged from Jin Yin-tan Hospital (Wuhan, China) between Jan 7 and May 29, 2020. We measured health outcomes 6 months (June 16-Sept 3, 2020), 12 months (Dec 16, 2020-Feb 7, 2021), and 2 years (Nov 16, 2021-Jan 10, 2022) after symptom onset with a 6-min walking distance (6MWD) test, laboratory tests, and a series of questionnaires on symptoms, mental health, health-related quality of life (HRQoL), return to work, and health-care use after discharge. A subset of COVID-19 survivors received pulmonary function tests and chest imaging at each visit. Age-matched, sex-matched, and comorbidities-matched participants without COVID-19 infection (controls) were introduced to determine the recovery status of COVID-19 survivors at 2 years. The primary outcomes included symptoms, modified British Medical Research Council (mMRC) dyspnoea scale, HRQoL, 6MWD, and return to work, and were assessed in all COVID-19 survivors who attended all three follow-up visits. Symptoms, mMRC dyspnoea scale, and HRQoL were also assessed in controls. Findings: 2469 patients with COVID-19 were discharged from Jin Yin-tan Hospital between Jan 7 and May 29, 2020. 1192 COVID-19 survivors completed assessments at the three follow-up visits and were included in the final analysis, 1119 (94%) of whom attended the face-to-face interview 2 years after infection. The median age at discharge was 57·0 years (48·0-65·0) and 551 (46%) were women. The median follow-up time after symptom onset was 185·0 days (IQR 175·0-197·0) for the visit at 6 months, 349·0 days (337·0-360·0) for the visit at 12 months, and 685·0 days (675·0-698·0) for the visit at 2 years. The proportion of COVID-19 survivors with at least one sequelae symptom decreased significantly from 777 (68%) of 1149 at 6 months to 650 (55%) of 1190 at 2 years (p<0·0001), with fatigue or muscle weakness always being the most frequent. The proportion of COVID-19 survivors with an mMRC score of at least 1 was 168 (14%) of 1191 at 2 years, significantly lower than the 288 (26%) of 1104 at 6 months (p<0·0001). HRQoL continued to improve in almost all domains, especially in terms of anxiety or depression: the proportion of individuals with symptoms of anxiety or depression decreased from 256 (23%) of 1105 at 6 months to 143 (12%) 1191 at 2 years (p<0·0001). The proportion of individuals with a 6MWD less than the lower limit of the normal range declined continuously in COVID-19 survivors overall and in the three subgroups of varying initial disease severity. 438 (89%) of 494 COVID-19 survivors had returned to their original work at 2 years. Survivors with long COVID symptoms at 2 years had lower HRQoL, worse exercise capacity, more mental health abnormality, and increased health-care use after discharge than survivors without long COVID symptoms. COVID-19 survivors still had more prevalent symptoms and more problems in pain or discomfort, as well as anxiety or depression, at 2 years than did controls. Additionally, a significantly higher proportion of survivors who had received higher-level respiratory support during hospitalisation had lung diffusion impairment (43 [65%] of 66 vs 24 [36%] of 66, p=0·0009), reduced residual volume (41 [62%] vs 13 [20%], p<0·0001), and total lung capacity (26 [39%] vs four [6%], p<0·0001) than did controls. Interpretation: Regardless of initial disease severity, COVID-19 survivors had longitudinal improvements in physical and mental health, with most returning to their original work within 2 years; however, the burden of symptomatic sequelae remained fairly high. COVID-19 survivors had a remarkably lower health status than the general population at 2 years. The study findings indicate that there is an urgent need to explore the pathogenesis of long COVID and develop effective interventions to reduce the risk of long COVID.

The Lancet. Respiratory medicine · 462 citationsread the source →

Traditional expectations versus US realities: first- and second-generation Asian Indian perspectives on end-of-life care.

Background: Although end-of-life care preferences vary across racial/ethnic groups, little is known about how cultural values affect end-of-life care preferences among South Asian immigrants and their offspring in the US. Objective: To examine the perspectives of first- and second-generation South Asians living in the US regarding end-of-life care. Design: Focus group study. Discussions explored participant preferences and experiences with family members facing the end of life. Participants: Twelve first-generation and 11 second-generation self-identified Asian Indians living in the mid-Atlantic region. Approach: Content analysis of focus group transcripts. Results: First-generation participants ranged in age from 41 to 76 years and were evenly split by gender. Second-generation participants ranged in age from 23 to 36 years and included seven women and four men. All participants were highly educated, and two thirds were either studying or working in a health care field. All but two subjects were Hindu. Several themes emerged that highlighted cultural differences and challenges for this population in the context of end-of-life care: attitudes toward death and suffering; family duty; and preferences for information disclosure and decision making. Participants described cultural challenges due to the evolution of traditional roles, lack of explicit discussion between patients and family members about preferences and care expectations, and a tension between wanting to meet traditional expectations and the challenges in doing so given US social realities. Conclusions: Traditional cultural values, such as duty to family, greatly influenced end-of-life care preferences and retained importance across generations. Clinicians caring for Asian Indian patients at the end of life may be better able to assess care preferences after exploring the complex interplay between traditional expectations and specific social realities for each patient. Particular attention should be given to attitudes toward death and suffering, family duty, and preferences for information disclosure and decision making.

Journal of general internal medicine · cohort or longitudinal · 41 citationsread the source →

Quality of life of family caregivers of elderly patients on hemodialysis and peritoneal dialysis.

Background: Despite the growing number of elderly patients with end-stage renal disease who need support, there are few studies about their caregivers. The objective of this study is to describe caregivers' characteristics and evaluate their burden and quality of life. Methods: We studied caregivers of elderly patients (>or=65 years) on hemodialysis (HD) therapy (n = 84), on peritoneal dialysis (PD) therapy (n = 40), and a group of caregivers (n = 77) of nonelderly HD patients. Their quality of life was evaluated by using the Medical Outcomes Study 36-Item Short-Form Health Survey questionnaire, Caregiver Burden scale, and Cognitive Index of Depression. Results: Most caregivers of the elderly were women (78%) aged 55 +/- 15 years and sons or daughters (41%) or wives or husbands (50%) of patients. Caregivers' Emotional Aspect, Vitality, and Mental Health were the most affected dimensions. The Mental Component Summary mean score, adjusted for patient race, educational level, primary diagnosis, hematocrit, comorbidities, and physical functional status, was worse for caregivers of PD than HD elderly patients (36.3 +/- 1.9 versus 44.8 +/- 1.5; P < 0.01). The most affected Caregiver Burden scale dimensions were General Strain and Environment. Thirty-two percent of caregivers showed signs of depression. Conclusion: Caregivers of elderly dialysis patients, especially of those on PD therapy, experience a significant burden and adverse effects on their quality of life. Educational, social, and psychological support interventions should be considered to improve the quality of life of caregivers.

American journal of kidney diseases : the official journal of the National Kidney Foundation · cohort or longitudinal · 130 citationsread the source →

Evaluation of Parental Dental Fear and Anxiety (DFA) on Adolescent Dental Treatment

INTRODUCTION Dental anxiety is a negative state of mind of a dental patient, which is shown to be excessive and unreasonable.[1] Dental fear is a normal emotional response to particularly alarming stimuli in situations related to dental treatment.[1] Dental fear and anxiety (DFA) are often used together to describe different types of fear experienced in the dental environment.[2] American Academy of Pediatrics divides adolescents into three age groups: early 11–14 years, middle 15–17 years, and late 18–21 years.[3] Five specific pathways for DFA were seen in adolescent dental patients. One of which being the parental pathway plays an important role in the transmission of fear hindering their child’s dental treatment.[4] Parental DFA is usually an excessive perturbing of the things that could go wrong in child’s oral health and is an important factor that has an impact on adolescents receiving dental treatment and maintenance of their oral health. It is necessary to recognize and know how parental DFA affects the dental treatment of adolescents. Thus, this review aimed at evaluating the parental influence of DFA on dental treatment of adolescents. MATERIALS AND METHODS DATA EXTRACTION AND LITERATURE SEARCH STRATEGY A broad search of literature published between 2005 and 2021 from electronic databases through Scopus, PubMed, Google Scholar, and Web of Science was performed. These studies were conducted in different countries as mentioned in Table 1. This review article includes eight cross-sectional studies, three longitudinal studies, and one descriptive study. The age group of children included ranged from 10 to 19 years. Table 1: Summary study design, data collection, dental fear and anxiety assessment scales used analysis, and interpretation of reviewed articlesThe search was carried out using the following keywords: dental anxiety, parental dental anxiety, adolescent, and dental treatment. The terms used to formulate the search strategies were parent OR mother OR father AND dental fear OR dental anxiety AND adolescent AND dental treatment. Data extracted were independently reviewed and disagreements were solved by discussion. A flowchart representing the method of article selection for the review is shown in Figure 1.Figure 1: Flowchart representing the method of article selectionINCLUSION CRITERIA We included the studies in which parental dental anxiety was a major criterion affecting different dental health conditions. Articles referring to adolescents (10–19 years) facing different oral health problems were also included in the study. EXCLUSION CRITERIA Abstracts that were not giving relevant data, data from unpublished articles, parental dental anxiety in medically compromised and specially challenged adolescents, and articles that did not include the adolescent age group were excluded from the study. RESULTS Approximately 83 publications were found related. Screening identified 10 articles that fulfilled the criteria of inclusion; full-text versions were retrieved and their references were screened for further relevant articles. Checking the subreference list, another two relevant articles were found. Thus, 12 articles were considered for this review that met the final inclusion criteria. Of 12 articles reviewed, 8 studies[56789101112] used validated assessment scales as mentioned by authors for measuring parental DFA. The authors have not specified the validation of assessment scales used for the other four studies.[13141516] The various DFA assessment scales used in the reviewed articles are mentioned in Table 2. Summary study design, data collection, analysis, and interpretation of reviewed articles are mentioned in Table 1.Table 2: Tabular representation of dental fear and anxiety assessment scales usedDISCUSSION Dental anxiety being primarily a negative parental factor was found to affect children from assessing regular dental care. Among the reviewed articles based on the outcome, we found that three articles explained about a relationship between parental DFA and adolescent dental treatment,[67,13] and the remaining nine articles explained about the correlation between parental DFA scores with adolescent DFA scores.[6891011,13141516] No significant association was observed between parental DFA and adolescent DFA scores in two of the studies,[78] whereas two studies showed positive association only during early adolescence.[914] Other five studies showed a significant positive correlation of parental DFA with their children’s dental anxiety,[10111215,16] of which three studies also suggested fathers as mediating role in transmission of DFA to their children.[1011,15] RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PARENTAL DENTAL FEAR AND ANXIETY AND ADOLESCENT DENTAL TREATMENT Adolescent dental treatment utilization mainly depends on parental/caretaker’s decision-making and their dental care obtaining habits. In childhood and even adolescence, this becomes very crucial for the development of good oral health behavior like regular visits to the dentist and preventive dental care.[17] Another postulated process is “social learning” wherein, media, friends, and relatives portray dentists in negative light or image leading to formation of DFA. These processes of information transmission and vicarious experience lead to negative portrayal of dentists and pessimistic expectations about the dentist’s role. All these predispose to DFA.[18] The absence of anxiety among parents would have a positive influence on a child.[19] Parental dental anxiety along with family income, economic stability, parental oral health literacy, and oral health practices is found to be a few factors that affect adolescent’s oral health-related quality of life (QOL).[202122] Dental anxiety being primarily a negative parental factor was found to affect children from accessing regular dental care, whereas parental self-dental utilization being a positive parental factor showed a positive impact on a child’s dental utilization.[23] Parents with higher anxiety levels were found to start brushing their children’s teeth at an earlier age; hence, a significant correlation was found between parent’s anxiety levels and the age at which the child starts to brush.[24] Dental health status of children was found to be better with more a positive attitude of parents toward dentistry.[25] Among the articles reviewed, two articles were found to have parental DFA during fixed orthodontic treatment of the adolescents which included the use of extraoral appliances. These two studies used different anxiety measurement scales for assessing parental DFA before and during the treatment procedures.[513] Poorer QOL is seen in families of adolescents with malocclusion as compared with the families of adolescents without any occlusal variation; the impact may have effects on parental or guardian’s emotions.[26] Both of the studies assessed state and trait dental anxiety of parents (STAI scale). State anxiety is transient, fluctuates, and varies in intensity. Trait anxiety is a personality trait; it is stable with time.[2728] The result showed that parent’s trait anxiety levels did not change during orthodontic treatment.[513] State anxiety was found to be within normal range and changed according to intensity of pressure.[13] There was an incidence of high levels of state anxiety and depression in both parents and patients under treatment with extra oral orthodontic appliances after 1 year of active treatment. Among patients waiting for orthodontic treatment and among their parents no statistically significant differences were noted in their trait anxiety levels.[5] The extra oral appliances had a negative effect on patient’s and parent’s anxiety levels which might indirectly affect the ongoing dental treatment. It was therefore recommended for clinicians to have alternate treatment modalities in mind to address this challenge.[5] Apart from orthodontic treatment, adolescents are also found commonly with traumatic dental injuries (TDIs) involving dentine/pulp or fracture of the root. A family’s QOL in such conditions was assessed using the family impact scale (FIS). This scale had four subscales, in which parental emotion was one of the subscales assessed. Parental emotion had a significant negative impact on the severity of TDI and severe untreated TDI of an adolescent can be a source of family distress.[629,30] EVIDENCE OF ASSOCIATION OF DENTAL FEAR AND ANXIETY BETWEEN PARENTS AND THEIR ADOLESCENTS Previous studies have shown that parents exhibit an influence on their children’s DFA through modeling and information.[31] The DFA experienced in childhood may lead into adulthood causing a predictor for dental treatment avoidance in adulthood.[3233] Among the reviewed articles, we found a correlation between the parental dental DFA scores with their adolescent’s DFA scores. Parent’s DFA and children’s DFA were assessed using the same dental anxiety measuring scale in nine of the studies,[6891011,13141516] and three studies[57,12] used different scales to measure anxiety levels in parents and children’s. Two of the studies showed no significant association between the anxiety level of adolescents and that of their parents.[78] One of the studies suggested that when a child reached adolescence, parental DFA does not directly contribute to child DFA. Other factors such as the presence of a sibling and family structure (single-parent family, nuclear) are found to play a significant role.[7] Lending support to the former findings, there was no relation between anxiety levels of adolescents (12–17 years) and that of their parents, whereas in the same study a positive association was found when the child is 8–11 years of age.[8] Two studies suggested a positive association in early adolescence.[914] In one of these two studies, mother’s and adolescents dental fear scores had a significant association at the age of 12 years and 18 years in given treatment scenarios such as “feeling about having their teeth scraped and polished, having teeth drilled and having an injection in gum,” whereas there was no significant association between dental fear scores of mother’s and adolescence at 15 years of age.[9] In another study reviewed, in early adolescence (11–12 years), there was a statistically significant association between parental and adolescent dental fear but in mid-adolescence (15–16 years) there was only an association with parental dental fear with their daughters.[14] It was found in the Finnish population, by eliminating dental fear among 30 years and elderly population, 41% of irregular attendees could become regular attenders.[34] In contrast, other five studies showed a significant positive correlation of parental DFA with their children’s dental anxiety.[10111215,16] Fearful parents of adolescents of age (11–16 years) assumed that their child had fear irrespective of whether the child had fear or not.[16] Three of these studies, where parental DFA was assessed in both the parents, suggested that the father also has a mediating role in the transmission of DFA to the children of age group 11–17 years,[10] 7–15 years,[11] and 7–12 years,[15] respectively. Father’s DFA is one of the best predictors of adolescence DFA[1035] and it is also found that child’s dental anxiety is best predicted by the parent’s fear of pain.[12] Previous studies have suggested that children experience fear and anxiety in their early life due to a lack of cognitive ability without having a clear perception of fearful situation and have been influenced by their parent’s fear and anxiety.[36] It is still unclear of the association of DFA between parents and late adolescents.[9] It was found that limited studies were found in the area of adolescent oral health. In the available literature, definite assessment methods were not used to assess the anxiety levels among parents. Furthermore, studies focused on late adolescence are indicated to establish the changes in oral health due to parental DFA. Adolescence is the transitional phase between childhood and adulthood and is a crucial period where they develop decision-making and independence; this has an impact on dental treatment-seeking behavior. The influence of parental dental anxiety might worsen the scenario. Parental DFA is seen to have a direct impact on the treatment itself.[56,20] Previously reviewed articles show a strong association of parental DFA and child’s DFA below 8 years of age.[37] In this study, we found parental DFA showed a positive association with their adolescent’s DFA, which thus hinders their dental treatment. There is a need to give attention to psychological parameters before and during the treatment of both parents and adolescents. Therefore, identifying parental dental anxiety prior to the treatment and intervention helps to reduce or eliminate DFA in children and further improves their dental treatment utilization. This study adds value in sensitizing dental professionals toward addressing parental concerns while treating adolescents and recommendations for appropriate implementations in teaching curricula and policies regarding the same. There is more potential to understand the background of parental DFA in single parents and in mother and father alone and also the factors that made them vulnerable. Parental education/counselling regarding various dental treatment procedures using appropriate methods such as focus group discussion will help to reduce DFA among the parental populations. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT We thank Health Sciences Library, Manipal Manipal Academy of Higher Education, Manipal, Udupi, Karnataka, India and Department of Psychiatry, Kasturba Medical College and Hospital, Manipal, Manipal Academy of Higher Education, Manipal, Udupi, Karnataka, India. FINANCIAL SUPPORT AND SPONSORSHIP This study was self-funded. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST There are no conflicts of interest. AUTHORS CONTRIBUTIONS Idea and conceptualization: Ramprasad Vasthare. Literature search: Thrisha Hegde, Bhavyashri P. Manuscript writing: Thrisha Hegde, Bhavyashri P, Ramprasad Vasthare, Karthik M, Ravindra Munoli. Editing of the review: Ramprasad Vasthare, Thrisha Hegde, Bhavyashri P, Karthik M, Ravindra Munoli. Intellectual inputs: Ramprasad Vasthare, Ravindra Munoli, Karthik M. ETHICAL POLICY AND INSTITUTIONAL REVIEW BOARD STATEMENT Not applicable as this was a narrative review. PATIENT DECLARATION OF CONSENT Not applicable. DATA AVAILABILITY STATEMENT Data of literature search is available on appropriate request to the corresponding author.

Journal of International Society of Preventive and Community Dentistry · review · 16 citationsread the source →

Whither the Attenuated Psychosis Syndrome?

After 4 years of debate, a decision has been made. The attenuated psychosis syndrome (APS) will not be a coded diagnosis in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-5). Formerly known as the psychosis risk syndrome, the proposed diagnosis was based on criteria developed in the mid-1990s that were informed by a comprehensive review of retrospective studies on the prodromal phase of nonaffective psychosis.1 These criteria aimed to identify prospectively people in the prodrome of schizophrenia and other psychotic disorders and have been variously titled “ultra high risk (UHR),” “clinical high risk (CHR),” “at risk mental state (ARMS),” and the “prodromal stage,” and included a group with attenuated (subthreshold) positive psychotic symptoms.2 The criteria are associated with rates of onset of psychotic disorder substantially higher than in the general population3 and other clinical populations.4 A recent meta-analysis reported the rate of onset of a psychotic disorder to be 36% after 3 years.5 About 73% of those developing a psychotic disorder fulfill criteria for schizophrenia spectrum psychoses.6 It should be noted that these data are from treated samples consisting of patients referred to specialist clinical services. Despite the consistent finding that there is a high risk of developing a psychotic disorder associated with the APS group,5 there has been considerable controversy around the idea of formally codifying it into a DSM5 diagnosis. Indeed, we, the authors of this communication, all active researchers in the area, have had differences in opinion about the merits of including APS as a new diagnosis in the DSM.7–12 One issue debated was the tension between the possibility of early intervention to prevent progression of disorder vs potential unnecessary diagnosis and treatment of what might be a self-limiting phase. The possibility of stigma and discrimination was also raised.10,11 Some speculated that a formal diagnosis would be assumed to equate to an indication for antipsychotic medication and so increase the likelihood of antipsychotic prescription.11 Others argued that the absence of an APS diagnosis has led to some clinicians using the term psychosis NOS (not otherwise specified), which may lead to antipsychotic prescription. The APS as an alternative to this diagnosis could then actually reduce antipsychotic prescribing.9,12 Importantly, an APS diagnosis will enable evidence-based treatments to be developed, including psychological therapies, and could therefore decrease antipsychotic use.12 Ultimately, the decision to exclude APS as a coded diagnosis was made not in response to any of the above issues or in the light of data addressing the principal disputes but because data on the diagnostic reliability of APS in clinical practice were limited and inconclusive. Following this decision, some critics have been quick to denounce the whole APS/ultra high-risk/clinical high-risk/prodromal concept.13–15 We, therefore, feel it is timely, as a group involved in high-risk (prodromal) research, to document some points of consensus between us and highlight areas for future research. Attempts to recognize the prodrome of schizophrenia prospectively have been active for nearly 20 years.2 Many samples of persons meeting high-risk criteria have been seen and evaluated. A strong consensus exists that individuals meeting APS criteria (which includes a criterion for help-seeking) are symptomatic and in need of clinical care.16–18 People meeting the criteria do in fact fulfill the broad definition of mental disorder: “a clinically significant behavioral and psychological syndrome or pattern … that is associated with present distress … or disability … or with a significantly increased risk of suffering death, pain, disability, or an important loss of freedom,”19 (p. xxi). Thus, treatment is clearly justified, regardless of the justification of reduction of risk or prevention. We agree that this treatment should include monitoring of mental state, supportive therapy, and attention to current practical needs. Cognitive therapy and omega-3 fatty acids may also be helpful. On current evidence, antipsychotic medication is no more effective than other more benign treatments and so is typically not recommended.20 A second point of consensus is that people meeting APS criteria have a greatly increased risk of developing a psychotic disorder within a brief time frame.3,5,21,22 Despite evidence that the transition rate (conversion from high-risk state to first-episode psychosis) may be declining in the short term23 and the finding of low rate of psychosis in recent intervention trials,24,25 its magnitude is similar to other risk syndromes,26,27 and still in the order of hundreds fold above the risk of the general population. Given this, we agree that regular assessment of mental state to detect first episode of psychosis is indicated. The monitoring of mental state and early detection of psychosis allow prompt treatment and the minimization of the duration of untreated psychosis, which, if prolonged, is harmful to both patients and their families and is known to be associated with a poor outcome.28,29 Finally, we agree that more research into the APS is needed. We support the Psychotic Disorders Workgroup in its recommendation to include the APS as a category in the appendix (Section 3) of DSM-5 as a condition for further study. Collectively, we have devoted many hours into thinking about this condition. Through our research and clinical experience with these patients, we have evolved our thinking and our conceptualization of APS. Initially, the high-risk criteria were developed, as the name suggests, to detect individuals at high risk of psychotic disorder. However, the use of the criteria should not be thought of as identifying and treating an asymptomatic group at risk of a poor outcome, analogous to detecting and treating hyperlipidemia to prevent myocardial infarction (MI). APS patients are symptomatic and distressed. Thus, angina may be a more apt analogy. However, better still is to think of the criteria as detecting chest pain. The condition is distressing, symptomatic, and leads to help seeking. It may indicate the early signs or risk for a serious cardiac disease such as MI, a serious but noncardiac disease, such as pneumonia or a benign self-limiting condition such as esophageal spasm or costochondritis. Likewise, APS may indicate the early signs or risk for illnesses such as nonaffective and affective psychotic disorder, presence or risk for a serious but nonpsychotic illness such as severe unipolar depression, or it may indicate something that is not serious and which may resolve, with or without treatments such as psychological support, stress reduction family interventions, and practical help. This way of conceptualizing APS leads to many different paths for research. Suggestions for the future research agenda follow. Investigation of different outcomes in both the short and long term including psychotic disorders, nonpsychotic disorders, persistence or remission of APS, and social and cognitive functioning is needed. Refining risk factors for these different outcomes is another avenue of research. It may be that added criteria are necessary to enrich the sample for schizophrenia, such as basic and negative symptoms and decline in cognitive and social skills.30,31 Other methods of enrichment for other outcomes can also be studied, including multiple subclinical symptoms plus depression,32 presence of personality disorder, family history of mental disorder, and childhood trauma and adversity.33 Examining recovery and remission of the high-risk state as outcomes is another area that is currently understudied. Searching for predictors of these positive outcomes can then lead to adding such factors to ascertainment criteria as exclusions, which would result in a reduced false positive rate and increased positive predictive power. Examining associated neurobiological,34–36 cognitive,37 physiological,38 metabolic,39 and genetic40,41 associations with the APS and its different outcomes is needed so that subgroups can be more sharply delineated. Longitudinal follow-up is needed to elucidate whether the biological markers that are observed in the APS group are indicative of a trait vulnerability to psychotic disorder or whether they are state markers. Comparison with other psychiatric groups without APS will determine whether biological findings are specific to APS and represent a continuum with psychotic disorders such as schizophrenia or whether they are associated with general psychiatric distress. Research is also needed as to what harms and benefits are associated with an APS diagnosis. This should include assessing any perceived stigma, and comparison made with the stigma, stereotypes, and wish for social distance associated with overt psychiatric symptoms that may occur prior to help seeking and diagnosis. Whether clinical care that provides information, treatment, and hope of a good outcome can minimize stigma should also be studied. The effects of creating a new diagnosis, on patients, their families, and the wider health system, needs to be better understood. While reliability of assessment has been demonstrated in previous studies using structured interviews,42,43 the clinical utility and reliability of assessment in routine practice needs to be assessed and improved and the impact of the proposed diagnosis on prescribing practice examined. Investigation of factors that lead APS patients to seek help will also be useful. Currently, it is unclear how much of the distress that leads to seeking help is related to the psychotic-like symptoms or to associated nonpsychotic mental disorders, such as depression and anxiety.44 Little is known about the prevalence of APS in adolescent and adult clinical populations and in the general community and this also needs further study. Further intervention research is also needed. Omega-3 fatty acids have shown promise in reducing symptoms as well as decreasing the risk of transition to psychotic disorder in one study.45 This requires replication. Other novel treatments such as psychological treatments, vitamin D, glycine, and other neuroprotective agents are also worth testing. Finally, with increasing the knowledge of risk factors for different outcomes (see above), the APS model could also be extended to a more general a strategy for early intervention in a range of mental disorders. It may be that many disorders develop from initial nonspecific symptoms and syndromes, from a background of specific and nonspecific risk factors (such as genes and early environment). Worsening of symptoms and acquisition of new symptoms may occur, together with progressive neurobiological abnormalities, and related neurobehavioral deficits, until clear-cut recognizable mental disorders appear.46 Progression of symptoms and neurobiological abnormalities could continue after “threshold” diagnosis, with development of chronic symptoms, relapses, and ongoing functional deterioration. Transition from one stage to the next is not inevitable, either due to different risk and resilience factors or due to nonspecific or specific intervention. Thus, preventive possibilities exist across this spectrum of evolving illness. This concept of a pluripotent risk syndrome opens up a range of research possibilities. Studying genetic and environmental risk factors and gene and environment interactions for different outcomes, further work on resilience and protective factors, and examination of different trajectories are all future avenues of research. Whether any specific markers for particular course and outcome can be detected early is another area and leads to the possibility of early specific treatments. Novel methods such as multimodal imaging and neurocognitive analysis, single subject methods to predict individual disease course are also possible. APS concept remains a useful one. It identifies people with significant mental health problems that justify treatment in their own right, as well as having a higher likelihood of developing a psychotic disorder (mostly schizophrenia) within a few years. Research into this group will increase our understanding of psychotic-like symptoms and their trajectories and the emerging phase of psychotic disorders. The APS concept is consistent with the continuum view of psychosis and is probably a reflection of biologic reality. Outcomes other than psychotic disorder are also clearly worthy of study. The placement of APS in the DSM-5 appendix should be a clarion call to the field to focus attention on these patients and families in need. National Health and Medical Research Council (Australia) Senior Research Fellowship (#566593), and the Colonial Foundation (to A.R.Y.); National Institute for Mental Health (NIMH) grants (#5U01MH081857 and #5R01 MH061523 to B.A.C.); German Research Foundation, NARSAD, the German Ministry of Education and Research, the Faculty of Medicine of the University of Cologne (to A.B.); the National Institute for Health Research (NIHR) Birmingham and Black Country Collaboration for Leadership in Applied Health Research and Care (to M.B.); NIHR Biomedical Research Centre for Mental Health at the South London and Maudsley NHS Foundation Trust and Institute of Psychiatry King’s College London (to P.F.-P., P.M., and L.V.); the German Research Foundation, the European Commission, the German Ministry of Education and Research, and the Faculty of Medicine of the University of Cologne (to J.K.); the University of Basel (to S.B. and A.R.-R.), Swiss National Foundation, Stanley Foundation, European Union FP7, Österreichische Forschungsförderungsgesellschaft, Foundation Alamaya (to A.R.-R.); NIMH (U01 MH081928, P50 MH080272), Massachusetts Department of Mental Health, R21 MH093294, R01 MH096027 (to L.S.); and NIMH and the Norwegian Research Council (to T.H.M.). A.B. and J.K. have received investigator-initiated grant support from Bristol Myers Squibb. A.B. has received speaker fees and travel support from Bristol Myers Squibb, Eli Lilly, Janssen Cilag, and Servier. P.D.M. has received unrestricted research grant support from Janssen Cilag, honoraria for educational events and consultancies from Janssen-Cilag and Roche, and unrestricted Research Grant Support from Astra Zeneca. As these sources of funding have not influenced the content of this article, all authors have declared that there are no conflicts of interest in relation to the subject of this article.

Schizophrenia Bulletin · 97 citationsread the source →

Emotional, developmental, and behavioral health of American children and their families: a report from the 2003 National Survey of Children's Health.

Background: Recent children's health surveys have documented a high prevalence of emotional, developmental, and behavioral problems among children. Data from the 2003 National Survey of Children's Health provide new insights into these problems and their association with family function and community participation. These issues have become a current focus of the World Health Organization. Methods: Answers to questions of interest from the 2003 National Survey of Children's Health were reported using estimates and SEs of rates. Statistical comparisons of rates with chi2 tests at the 0.05 level were made when relevant. Results: The most commonly diagnosed problems among children 6-17 years of age were learning disabilities (11.5%), attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (8.8%), and behavioral problems (6.3%); among preschoolers, speech problems (5.8%) and developmental delay (3.2%) were most common. One in 200 children was diagnosed with autism. In contrast, rates of parental concerns about emotional, developmental, or behavioral problems were much higher; for example, 41% of parents had concerns about learning difficulties and 36% about depression or anxiety. Children with developmental problems had lower self-esteem, more depression and anxiety, more problems with learning, missed more school, and were less involved in sports and other community activities. Their families experienced more difficulty in the areas of childcare, employment, parent-child relationships, and caregiver burden. Conclusions: The most recent National Survey of Children's Health mirrored results of previous surveys regarding rates of diagnosed emotional, developmental, and behavioral problems, including an escalating diagnosis of autism among children. Reported rates of parental concerns about these problems were much higher, suggesting possible underdiagnosis of children's problems. Children with chronic problems had diminished family functioning, more school absences, and less participation in community activities compared with other children. Their parents experienced more difficulty with childcare, employment, and parenting skills. A change in treatment emphasis is needed, away from an exclusive focus on a child's developmental and behavioral problems to one that addresses the impacts of these problems on the family and community participation. A new approach to the way these issues are addressed and managed has the potential to enhance the quality of life for a child, as well as the parents, and to produce more meaningful and tangible solutions to these complex and increasingly evident problems.

Pediatrics · 134 citationsread the source →

Clinical Presentation of Left Atrial Cardiac Myxoma

Introduction Cardiac myxoma is the most frequent “benign” tumor of the heart and presents an important diagnostic challenge (4,43,47). Myxomas may resemble many cardiovascular or systemic diseases, and can arise in any of the cardiac chambers, although 75% occur in the left atrium. Most cases of atrial myxomas are now diagnosed in living patients, allowing successful surgical extirpation (1,3,30,44,53). Before the introduction of angiocardiography in 1951, cardiac myxoma diagnosis was made only at autopsy (22). The first successful surgical removal of an atrial myxoma was performed in 1954 (35,47). In 1959, the first M-mode echocardiogram of a left atrial myxoma was reported (16). Indeed, the introduction of echocardiography has provided an important noninvasive means of diagnosis for cardiac myxomas (55). Thus, the diagnosis of small myxomas (less than 5 cm in size and asymptomatic) is becoming easier. We report here the experience of a French cardiovascular center in the clinical presentation of left atrial myxomas. The large number of patients in this series allowed us to perform an analytic, clinicopathologic study. Patients and Methods We reviewed the 112 cases of left atrial myxoma seen at 1 institution (Hôpital Louis Pradel, Lyons, France) over a 40-year period (1959–1998). In all cases the diagnosis was established before surgical removal. The patients’ medical records were reviewed, and data concerning clinical presentation, diagnostic methods, and postoperative course were collected. Histopathologic slides were reviewed for all cases by the same pathologist (RL). Other locations where cardiac myxoma occurred during that time period were the right atrium (15 cases), left ventricle (2 cases), and right ventricle (1 case). Follow-up information was obtained by contacting either the patients or the attending physicians, and a standardized questionnaire was completed for each case. Statistical analysis A chi-square test, or the Fisher exact test when required, was performed for all qualitative variables, and odds ratios (OR) with 95% confidence intervals (95% CI) were computed. For ordinal variables a Wilcoxon rank sum test was used. Data analysis was performed using SAS (Statistical Analysis System, SAS Institute Inc., Cary, NC). The variables studied in the statistical analysis were 1) sex and age, period of diagnosis (before or after echocardiography was available), delay to diagnosis (delay between the first symptoms and diagnosis), possible systematic (serendipitous) discovery; 2) size of the tumor (> or < 5 cm), tumor surface appearance (smooth or villous); 3) the main symptoms: cardiac (cardiac failure, malaise or syncope, chest pain or palpitations), embolic (cerebral, coronary, or peripheral artery), systemic (fever, weight loss, or pseudo-connective tissue disease signs), or neurologic (stroke, vertigo, epilepsy, coma, or other signs); 4) cardiac auscultation modifications (pseudo-mitral signs, “tumor plop”, nonspecific other signs); 5) possible chest X-ray abnormalities (left cardiac failure signs, cardiomegaly, pleural effusion, left atrium enlargement, visible myxoma when calcified), electrocardiogram (ECG) alterations (arrhythmias or conduction disturbances, ST-segment and T-wave shifts, left atrial hypertrophy, and nonspecific signs), or serologic test abnormalities (elevated erythrocyte sedimentation rate [ESR], anemia). Results Patient characteristics The study group included 72 women, (64% of the whole sample; median age, 53 yr; range, 23–84 yr) and 40 men (36% of the sample; median age, 58 yr, range, 5–77 yr). Forty-six patients (41% of the sample, 31 women, 15 men) were less than 50 years old, 47 (42%, 31 women, 16 men) were between 50 and 70 years, and 19 (17%, 10 women, 9 men) were older than 70. Age distribution was homogenous in men, but most female patients were between 40 and 60 years old (Figure 1).Fig. 1: Age distribution of 112 patients with left atrial myxoma. The clinical and laboratory features of left atrial myxoma in our series are presented in Table 1. The different frequencies of clinical and laboratory signs according to sex and age are detailed in Table 2. Male patients were more at risk than females for embolic complications and for neurologic symptoms; females were more at risk than males to develop systemic symptoms such as fever; younger patients (age <50 yr) had more neurologic symptoms and cardiac auscultation abnormalities than older patients (age >50 yr).TABLE 1: Clinical and laboratory features of left atrial myxoma (112 cases)TABLE 2: Frequencies of clinical and laboratory signs by sex and age*We divided the patients into 2 groups according to the pre-and post-echocardiography periods: 1) between 1959 and 1977, when the only diagnostic methods were angiocardiography and cardiac cathe-terization, only 14 patients (12.5%) underwent surgery; 2) since 1977, with 2-dimensional echocardiography use (transthoracic, then transesophageal), about 5 patients per year have undergone surgery for left atrial myxoma (98 patients, 87.5%). The sex ratio and age ranges are similar in these 2 patient groups, but other differences can be identified (Table 3). Before 1977, most patients were diagnosed on the basis of serologic or blood test abnormalities (particularly elevated ESR) and radiologic abnormalities; chest X-ray evidence of cardiac failure or left atrium enlargement was particularly prevalent in patients diagnosed before 1977 compared with those diagnosed after 1977 (p = 0.006 and p = 0.02, respectively).TABLE 3: Symptoms by year of diagnosis*Delay before surgery In our series, the time interval between symptoms onset and diagnosis (surgical removal) varied from 0 to 126 months (median, 4 mo). The median delay before surgery was 5.5 months before 1977, and 3 months after 1977; the difference is not significant. The median delay to diagnosis increased significantly when cardiac symptoms were present; there was no significant difference for the other symptoms (Table 4).TABLE 4: Delay to diagnosis by year and by principal clinical symptoms*Initial symptoms ( Figure 2) For 11 patients, the left atrial myxoma diagnosis was a mere chance, or serendipitous, discovery (“systematic findings” in Figure 2). Among these patients, in 9 cases echocardiography (8 cases) or computed tomography (CT) (1 case) was performed for another indication and allowed a diagnosis of myxoma. For 2 patients, echocardiography had been systematically performed during follow-up for surgery on a right atrial myxoma. Fig. 2: Initial symptoms of left atrial myxoma (112 cases).The most common initial symptoms of left atrial myxoma in our series were related to mitral valve obstruction: dizziness and occasionally syncope, palpitations, dyspnea, cough, pulmonary edema, or congestive heart failure were observed in 58 patients. Eight patients showed atypical paroxysmal clinical manifestations: chest pain, hemoptysis, limb claudication, thoracic noise, shortness of breath, or syncope when reclining. Embolic manifestations suggested myxoma in 18 patients. Constitutional or general systemic signs appeared as initial manifestations for 17 patients: myalgia, muscle weakness, arthralgia, fever, weight loss, fatigue, and Raynaud syndrome. Clinical features at diagnosis All patients presented with at least 1 or more symptoms of the classic triad: 1) obstructive cardiac signs; 2) embolic signs; and 3) constitutional or systemic manifestations (See Table 1). 1) Intracardiac obstruction signs occurred in 75 patients. Pulmonary edema or progressive congestive cardiac failure (dyspnea, orthopnea) were the most common symptoms (n = 48). Malaise or syncope occurred in 16 cases. Two patients experienced cardiac arrest before surgery and fully recovered after resuscitation. Other nonspecific cardiac symptoms were present in 34 patients: cough, thoracic pain, palpi-tations, myocardial infarction due to coronary embolism. Malaise, palpitations, or thoracic pain could vary with body postural changes. 2) Signs of embolism were present in 33 patients, either with 1 (n = 25) or several (n = 8) locations. Embolic locations were the central nervous system (n = 24), in 1 case in the retinal artery, the upper and lower extremities (n = 15), and the coronary arteries (n = 4). 3) Thirty-eight patients presented with systemic or constitutional symptoms. These symptoms were obviously nonspecific, including fever (n = 22), weight loss or fatigue (n = 20), and immunologic diseases mimicking symptoms such as myalgia, muscle weakness, arthralgia, or Raynaud syndrome (n = 6). 4) Other clinical presentations 4.1) Twenty-nine patients had neurologic symptoms, particularly transient or permanent motor or sensory neurologic deficiencies (n = 23), when cerebral emboli were present (stroke). Three of these patients developed multiple cerebral aneurysms, induced by cerebral emboli. Three patients had epileptic fits, or multilocular sclerosis mimicking symptoms. Six patients also suffered from other neurologic manifestations, such as vertigo or coma. One patient with streptococcal meningitis underwent surgery for a supposed antibiotic-resistant endocarditis suggested by echocardiographic findings, but surgery uncovered an incidental noninfected myxoma. 4.2) One patient had fever and positive blood cultures for Streptococcus viridans. 4.3) Three patients were investigated for liver abnormalities connected in fact with right cardiac failure. 4.4) For 3 patients, the main symptoms were abdominal pain or hemoptysis. Physical examination (cardiac auscultation) On cardiac auscultation 72 patients (64%) had abnormal findings, 18 (16%) of them with postural changes or with time examination modifications. These murmurs looked like significant mitral stenosis findings: apical diastolic or presystolic murmur (n = 60, 53%). A tumor plop was heard in 17 patients (15%), all before 1989. Other auscultatory features were changes in preexisting murmurs, gallops, or modification of the first (split) or second heart sound (n = 12, 11%). A significant was observed between cardiac auscultation abnormalities and 1) systemic symptoms (fever, weight loss or and 2) cardiac symptoms and signs (cardiac failure, (Table no between auscultatory signs and embolic or neurologic symptoms was between clinical The most frequent laboratory was in patients Table 1). in men, in was observed in 15 patients. blood or was present in patients. The between these serologic abnormalities and systemic manifestations was significant Table there was no significant between serologic signs and or neurologic symptoms. abnormalities of the patients (n = had abnormal Table 1). atrial was the most frequent (n = or or conduction were Other were ST-segment abnormalities (n = or nonspecific abnormalities (n = hypertrophy, The of abnormalities with systemic manifestations and cardiac signs was significant Table was no significant with embolic or neurologic symptoms. were abnormal in patients Table 1). included pulmonary or congestive heart failure signs (n = and nonspecific (n = atrial enlargement (n = that made the tumor visible (n = and pleural were (n = The of radiologic abnormalities with systemic and cardiac manifestations was significant Table X-ray abnormalities were significantly less frequent in patients with embolic or neurologic methods Before 1977, all cases were diagnosed by angiocardiography with left heart (n = 1977, echocardiography was the diagnostic (n = only M-mode echocardiography was (Figure 3). 2-dimensional and particularly echocardiography the methods in many cases. For 2 patients the diagnosis was established by or 3: A myxoma is seen in the left The diagnosis of myxoma was obtained after surgical tumor for all cases. On the tumor from 1 cm to 15 The size was for was than 5 cm in and in cases had been during The weight of the from 15 to In our series of the myxomas were with a cm), and were the left atrial myxomas in our series, the and from the left atrial with only a other left and small mitral valve The myxoma surface was studied in was or in of these (n = and (Figure 4) in the other cases (n = The less common or (Figure 5) myxomas had a surface that of multiple or and with a to (Figure 4: left atrial myxoma after left atrial were on the of myxoma in an of an The myxoma had a or an and a were the The surface of the tumor was by a of was observed in of the cases. We with a myxoma from with a and or different of 1) (Figure with or by then by 2) (Figure with many or in the of the cases were left atrial of them with and with were myxomas with All were observed in patients with myxoma and atrial myxoma with with myxoma in atrial myxoma with or myxoma in significant could be between myxoma size or 5 and diagnosis or or of or serologic symptoms or signs (Table 6). a myxoma size cm was significantly with cardiac symptoms, auscultatory signs, and and chest X-ray of myxomas appeared to be more and the delay to diagnosis was for small than for large Table of clinical features to myxoma size was significantly with neurologic symptoms, embolic and cardiac auscultation there was no significant between and or X-ray signs or symptoms; discovery; or delay in diagnosis (Table of clinical features to myxoma surface course All patients had patients during the 1 patient in during a second surgical for a of myxoma years after the first surgical a on in with cardiac and on the second postoperative from a in from mitral by a mitral and a in from meningitis with the the incidental tumor had been 1 patient a mitral valve endocarditis was with the myxoma. The most frequent postoperative was transient or atrial in patients A permanent cardiac for was for only 2 patients. Follow-up the postoperative patients were to patients to and not our Among the other patients, 4 and were during the follow-up Patients presented with peripheral fully The follow-up for patients with multiple cerebral is 14 years a In the present series, were for a median of 3 years 1 yr). Six patients had a of myxoma. Three patients with myxoma in the left and 17 years Three other patients had One of them suffered 2 in the left 16 and months The other 2 patients with had an initial myxoma in the right for 1 of them the was in the left atrium 3 years and for the other the were multiple in the left atrium and years and then in the right atrium years We report here the series of patients with left atrial myxoma diagnosed in a to our The patients presented over a 40-year ratio is with other in this ratio from to Myxomas can occur in all but are most frequent between the and of occur in although there is no for this female due in to In our series, younger age is significantly with neurologic signs or cardiac auscultation and is with neurologic or embolic symptoms in men and systemic symptoms in Clinical features The clinical features of these are by and there are no signs and symptoms that the of a myxoma In a of there are no symptoms at all in our there is no significant between the size of the tumor or 5 and the of discovery or atrial myxomas when the mitral or systemic 1) symptoms occur in of patients in our cases as mitral valve in mitral atrial and of fever are only of patients had in our study. Cardiac obstruction can be by progressive congestive cardiac failure on or or by syncope, or to mitral valve obstruction by the myxoma or coronary arteries The of obstruction may vary with body and these postural changes are particularly of myxoma (35,47). Cardiac failure the most frequent in our In our the of cardiac signs increased the diagnosis to that clinical symptoms are by another more common disease due to 2) emboli are the second of the classic in of myxoma patients in our study. than of emboli to the central nervous system in our but any may be to a of symptoms and cases emboli in the upper and lower coronary and more emboli may to aneurysms, as of cardiac myxomas as in 3 patients in our was 12, yr, We that the of an or surface is significantly with cerebral and peripheral 3) Constitutional signs are the of the classic these symptoms are may occur in to of cases The is lower in our series studied a at a cardiovascular These signs and symptoms myalgia, muscle weakness, arthralgia, fever, weight loss, and are obviously nonspecific and may occur in a of or or immunologic diseases tissue manifestations have also been reported in myxoma patients Cardiac auscultation Cardiac auscultatory may vary between and may on body presystolic or diastolic murmurs, significant mitral may be heard in more than of the patients in our The auscultatory of myxoma is “tumor is a heart sound of heard after the second heart sound may be with a heart sound or a mitral The tumor plop is in only of patients in our We established a significant between cardiac auscultation abnormalities and cardiac or systemic symptoms. and are abnormal in only of the patients those with systemic symptoms significant was in our The main but nonspecific laboratory abnormalities are and elevated or is or may occur by on the has also been common are and that the and of a by the tumor may be for systemic and manifestations has been with of in patients with myxoma that to after surgical removal A between the size of the tumor and the of has also been suggested have also been in myxoma tissue myxoma tissue in cases by and are nonspecific but observed in our atrial in of patients, the alterations by the is (less than of cases) in to the in mitral valve We observed a significant between signs and the of cardiac or systemic symptoms. also nonspecific features in the patients and are not for when the tumor is in our a left atrium enlargement and signs of pulmonary may be In our series, chest X-ray abnormalities were significantly with cardiac or systemic symptoms, but there were radiologic signs when the myxoma was by embolic or neurologic In cardiac signs or symptoms are more prevalent with large and may that embolic becoming are diagnosed before the the size 5 that to cardiac and radiologic data a positive between small tumor size and embolic Table 6). methods is the and diagnostic of is and not any risk of tumor and and cardiac examination may be by the echocardiography is less with an to but echocardiography the for surgery is only on echocardiographic evidence of the in our series angiocardiography has not been since coronary in patients over 40 years old is in to coronary disease Other diagnostic methods and The of and over echocardiography is that of and thoracic are also more in tumor and tumor and size data that most left atrial myxomas arise from the atrial or the on the of and on the appearance is or with a or or is and the surface is either or and in our myxomas with constitutional symptoms, or In the such as and surface are seen in older that In our series, there was no significant between and The size and weight of myxomas but in our the of symptoms was in patients with on could or myxomas and or myxomas according to the of the that all occurred in patients with and myxomas. the of cardiac myxomas have been The of most is that myxomas are of is no that myxomas are myxomas may have a of that at first may be the of multiple surface or is not with or any of presentation, and is important not to an on the basis of these atypical are cardiac not be with myxomas The to the tumor are to be and analysis has that myxoma as tumor = and are and may be for and cases with is as is the showed that was by is also a for the that myxomas arise from the to A study that myxomas with a between tumor size and the of this a in Myxomas may to the but these not have any The myxoma tissue emboli may may the and may or may but any cerebral tissue years the may to Three patients in our series had embolic that into the with of multiple aneurysms, any or during and follow-up The of for myxomas is surgical removal the diagnosis is of the tumor is Embolic complications or are in patients: of patients in the time of our series, not due to cardiac but 2 patients had cardiac arrest in the before surgery with successful resuscitation. surgery is a as most are can be The may according to In our series, was 3 patients during the postoperative period before and another patient in of meningitis not to myxoma. The most frequent postoperative was transient or with an of Cardiac myxomas occur but or cases have been The reported rate ranges from to in the in our are reported from as as a months to as as years after of the myxoma in our The of is not but risk or of tumor of the a of tumor in the In most cases of of the to be the of Patients with abnormalities are at risk of and from 2 or more of the cardiac and myxomas or of the with and are as or The risk of for and myxomas is about and is only for In our series, 3 cases the cardiac myxoma the time of myxoma patients are younger than myxoma patients. myxomas of the 2 patient groups are not A to has been identified The is In the the rate is and after of myxomas ranges from 0 to in our may surgical removal in our A patients may permanent cardiac for conduction 2 patients in our In of the of a tumor that with mitral valve to in heart failure, the mitral valve is In our only 1 patient mitral valve for endocarditis with left atrial myxoma. the myxoma patients to be and cases. echocardiogram is over the period at diagnosis The mitral valve other and heart more common than and occur in patients with myocardial infarction or systemic symptoms are present (fever, weight loss, the diagnosis heart and tissue disease or The of embolic and constitutional symptoms is due more to but may also myxoma. The of or syndrome to the 2 diseases, as these are in myxoma. myxomas are occasionally the clinical of myxoma and endocarditis more of cardiac myxomas reported 40 cases with a presentation similar to is no clinical between and noninfected myxoma cardiac symptoms and the rate of systemic or cerebral constitutional symptoms significantly in patients with myxoma (fever, elevated and men are more than series of 112 cases of left atrial myxoma clinical that this tumor may a of clinical symptoms not only such as cardiac but also or neurologic is made only on clinical there are no signs or symptoms. but or cases have been that and of the by the tumor may be for or including the is the of for diagnosis and follow-up of this myxomas are be in the diagnosis of mitral valve disease and congestive heart failure, in patients with is also for any patient with embolic embolic in in the of signs or symptoms of endocarditis or to a of myxoma as the embolic The obtained by be are to the clinical features of in in myxoma or be studied for embolic myxomas with of could be performed to for the ratio and age We a series of 112 cases of left atrial myxoma diagnosed in a French and 40 age range, yr) over 40 years, from 1959 to Symptoms of mitral valve the first of the classic of myxoma presentation, were present in 75 patients with cardiac failure or Symptoms of the second frequent presentation in the classic were observed in 33 cases with 1 or several cerebral emboli with are at risk than females of embolic The of the classic of constitutional symptoms with fever, weight loss, or symptoms tissue due to and patients have more neurologic symptoms, and female patients have more systemic symptoms. patients (64%) had cardiac auscultation valve disease and more the tumor plop The most frequent was left atrial were The number of myxoma patients diagnosed after 1977 the introduction of echocardiography as a noninvasive diagnostic there was no significant in the time from onset of symptoms to between patients seen in the before and after The tumor from 1 to 15 cm with a weight of between 15 and The myxoma surface was or in of the and in the other cases. Myxomas in patients with embolism have a those in patients with cardiac symptoms, auscultation signs, tumor and electrocardiogram or radiologic signs of left atrium and are significantly the The is and only 4 occurred our 112 cases over a median follow-up of 3 The rate is but follow-up and echocardiography are for patients. The surgical were performed during the 40-year period by We are to for the

Medicine · review · 878 citationsread the source →

Developmental Coordination Disorder

For the last 100 years, poor motor coordination in children has been recognized as a developmental problem.1 As early as 1937, these children were classified as “clumsy.”1 Since then, other terms such as “motorically awkward,” “motor impaired,” and “physically awkward” have been used to describe these children, and the terms “developmental apraxia” and “perceptual motor difficulties” have been used to characterize this developmental problem.2,3 Since the 1994 International Consensus Conference on Children and Clumsiness, the term “developmental coordination disorder” (DCD) has been used to describe the condition of children with motor incoordination.1,4 The purpose of this article is to provide the following information about DCD: (1) definition, (2) prevalence, (3) etiology, (4) discussion regarding the difficulties in classifying these children, (5) common characteristics, (6) long-term prognosis, and (7) brief review of treatment approaches. Developmental coordination disorder, a chronic and usually permanent condition found in children, is characterized by motor impairment that interferes with the child's activities of daily living and academic achievement.3,5 In order for a child to be diagnosed with DCD, these motor impairments must negatively affect some other aspect of his or her life.6 Impairment alone, however, does not qualify a child for the diagnosis of DCD; the motor impairment must not be caused by or have the symptoms of an identifiable neurological problem.2,5 That is, the child must not have any disturbances of muscle tone (ataxia or spasticity), sensory loss, or involuntary movements. If mental retardation is present, the testable IQ of the child must be greater than 70 and the motor impairments must be greater than what would normally be expected for children with mental retardation.5 Finally, a child diagnosed with DCD must not meet the criteria for a diagnosis of pervasive developmental disorder.6 Developmental coordination disorder appears to be a fairly common disorder of childhood and is usually identified in children between 6 and 12 years of age. Ten years ago, researchers7,8 estimated that DCD occurred in 10% to 19% of school-aged children. With a more precise definition of DCD, the current prevalence is estimated to be between 5% and 8% of all school-aged children,5,9–11 with more boys than girls (2:1) being diagnosed with DCD.12 This difference may reflect higher referral rates for boys, because the behavior of boys with motor incoordination may be more difficult to manage at home and in the classroom.8 In addition, a higher incidence of DCD may be found among children with a history of prenatal or perinatal difficulties.3 Due to the heterogeneity of DCD, finding its cause has been difficult.3 Several theories speculate that the etiology of DCD is part of the continuum of cerebral palsy5,13; is secondary to prenatal, perinatal, or neonatal insult3; or is secondary to neuronal damage at the cellular level in the neurotransmitter or receptor systems.14 Hadders-Algra14 based her view that DCD is a result of damage at the cellular level on evidence that cerebral palsy is often caused by prenatal damage that cannot be identified by current diagnostic techniques. Developmental coordination disorder, a chronic and usually permanent condition found in children, is characterized by motor impairment that interferes with the child’s activities of daily living. Although both standard and nonstandard functional tests are available to identify the specific disabilities experienced by a child with DCD, relating the observed disabilities to the primary impairment(s) or any possible neuropathology is not easily accomplished. The problems experienced by children with DCD are believed to emanate from abnormalities in neurotransmitter or receptor systems rather than from damage to specific groups of neurons or brain regions.15 Children's difficulties with coordination can result from a combination of one or more impairments in proprioception, motor programming, timing, or sequencing of muscle activity. A number of theories have evolved in an attempt to shed light on the specific neuronal processing deficits that contribute to DCD. Current models used to explain the neural regulation of posture and movement during development can serve as a basis for the examination and management of individuals with DCD. Using these models, many of the deficits of motor control observed in these children can be described. A variety of theoretical models exist to explain the role of the nervous system in motor development. Forty years ago, the primitive reflex model was a generally accepted theory used to explain how the brain regulates early motor behavior.16 As development proceeded, the higher centers exerted increasing control over the lower reflexes.16 These earlier models were based on a hierarchy of motor control in which higher centers were capable of planning and executing a motor plan without external or internal feedback from lower centers of the central nervous system (CNS). The more recently proposed systems model suggests a more complex interaction among various levels of the CNS. In the systems model, sensory feedback is interpreted by the CNS, and the appropriate movement strategy is selected based on current experience, the state of the internal and external environment, and memory of similar movements. Edelman's neuronal group selection theory includes aspects of both of these models and proposes that functional groups of neurons exist at all levels of the CNS.17 These neuronal groups are determined by evolution, but their functional integrity is dependent on afferent information produced by movement and experience.17 In this regard, these genetically determined collections of interconnected neurons (neuronal groups) in both cortical and subcortical structures serve as an early repertoire for motor behavior or receipt of specific sensory information.14,17,18 According to neuronal group selection theory, motor development proceeds in 2 phases.15 The first, the phase of primary variability, is characterized by crude and erratic motor activity that does not require sensory information for its initiation or guidance. These self-generated movements give rise to afferent (visual, kinesthetic) inputs that reinforce more specific synaptic connections within each group. An intermediate period in which effective patterns are selected is followed by the secondary variability phase. In this phase, sensory and motor factors interact to establish the intercellular connections that produce the specific and complex muscle contraction patterns that characterize coordinated, goal-directed movement. Reciprocal connections between groups subserving movements in various body parts and representing different parts of visual space are reinforced with each repetition of a particular function. As the more efficient movement patterns are practiced, the appropriate synaptic circuits are reinforced and subsequently established.14,17,19,20 The literature includes a wide variation in terminology and criteria to describe DCD. This variation has made studying the causes of DCD and developing treatment approaches for the child with DCD difficult. In their analysis of clinical trial data, Macnab et al21 identified 5 different subtype profiles of DCD. The first subtype included children with better gross motor than fine motor skills, although both were still below normal while standing balance and visual-perceptual skills were both within normal ranges. Compared with children of the same age with DCD, children in the second subtype scored high on measures of upper-limb speed and dexterity, visuomotor integration, and visual-perception skills, but they demonstrated poor performance on measures of kinesthetic ability (accuracy in discriminating movement and position of the upper limbs) and balance. Children in subtype 3 demonstrated the greatest overall motor involvement and were the only subtype to have difficulty with both kinesthetic and visual skills. Compared with their peers with DCD, children in subtype 4 performed well on kinesthetic tasks but demonstrated poor performance on tasks requiring visual and dexterity skills. Children in subtype 5 demonstrated poor performance on measurements of running speed and agility compared with their peers with DCD; however, they performed well relative to their peers with DCD in the tasks involving visual-perception skills. The development of different classification systems for DCD may have been influenced by the design of motor tests.21 For example, items testing one motor skill may be influenced by a related motor skill (eg, ball-throwing skills cannot be separated from visuomotor skills). In addition, a test may have an over-representation of one skill that could unduly influence the child's performance on the test. For example, having a greater number of items testing gross motor rather than fine motor skills could either positively or negatively influence a child's score, depending on the child's specific strengths and weaknesses. Another difficulty in interpreting the literature on DCD is the lack of inclusion criteria. Geuze et al22 reviewed 164 publications on the study of DCD and found that only 60% of the studies had objective inclusion criteria. Because of this lack of inclusion criteria, Geuze et al recommended that a child scoring below the 15th percentile on standardized tests of motor skills and having an IQ score above 69 would qualify for a diagnosis of DCD. The inconsistency among standardized motor tests used to identify children with DCD is another problem. In one study,5 the Bruininks-Oseretsky Test of Motor Proficiency (BOTMP) and the Movement Assessment Battery for Children (M-ABC) were administered to 157 children with DCD and 155 children with no motor difficulties; the test results were in agreement 82% (kappa=.62) of the time in distinguishing children who had DCD from children who did not have DCD. This is considered a substantial level of agreement.23 In a study of 202 children (101 with DCD and 101 without DCD), the BOTMP and M-ABC agreed only 67% of the time (kappa=.41), which was considered a moderate level of agreement.24 Because the BOTMP and the M-ABC are 2 of the most commonly used tests for identifying children with DCD, the potential lack of agreement by these tests in identifying children who have DCD is a concern. Two primary factors may explain the difference in outcomes between the BOTMP and M-ABC when used to identify children with DCD.24 First, the BOTMP allows the tester to verbally prompt and correct the child during the testing procedure, allowing the child who is dependent on more external controls to do better on the BOTMP. The BOTMP tends to under-identify children with DCD. Second, the M-ABC requires more careful instruction on the part of the examiner and allows more opportunities for the examinee to practice, but does not allow any verbal or physical prompting by the examiner. Children with attention problems may have more difficulty with the careful instructions for the M-ABC. Another difficulty in classifying children with DCD is the overlap with other disorders. Approximately 41% of children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and 56% of children with learning disabilities also have DCD.5,21 Further confusing the classification scheme is that the terms “developmental coordination disorder,” for which no identifiable organic brain damage is present, and “apraxia,” which is caused by identifiable brain damage, have been used interchangeably.3 Children with DCD may have a wide range of dysfunctions. These dysfunctions can be grouped into 3 areas: gross motor, fine motor, and psychosocial. Many children with DCD have neurological soft signs such as hypotonia, persistence of primitive reflexes, and immature balance reactions that interfere with gross motor development.5,25 These children also may demonstrate an awkward running pattern, fall frequently, drop items, and have difficulty imitating body positions and following 2- to 3-step motor commands.8 Because of their gross motor problems, children with DCD also perform poorly in sporting events,2 possibly due, in part, to their slow reaction and movement times.7 Their decreased participation in sports may result in decreased muscle force.8 Difficulty with handwriting or drawing often is the first identifiable sign of a fine motor problem and is the most frequently mentioned motor problem experienced by children with DCD. Children with DCD frequently have difficulty planning and executing other fine motor skills such as gripping and dressing.26–29 Unfortunately, children with DCD may experience problems not limited to fine or gross motor areas. These children also may experience psychosocial problems at school. Children with DCD may have learning disabilities or reading problems and may be at increased risk for lower intelligence.5,8 They may act out in class more than other children,13 may be the class clown, and may exhibit less socially desirable means of gaining recognition and friends.8 Adolescents with DCD have been found to have fewer friends, and they have more feelings of low self-worth and more anxiety than peers without DCD and younger children with DCD.30 Historically, parents have been told not to worry about their child's clumsiness because the child will outgrow the problem.31 However, current researchers in the area of DCD report that the children do not outgrow clumsiness and that, without intervention, they will not improve.1,8,12,27,31 Losse et al31 tested 17 children aged 6 years and retested them at age 16 years. The children with motor difficulties at 6 years of age continued to exhibit problems at 16 years of age. In another study,32 818 children with DCD were tested for reading comprehension at age 7 years and then again at age 10 years. A positive correlation in poor reading comprehension existed for children with DCD at 7 and 10 years of age. A follow-up study was conducted on 22-year-old individuals (N=55) who at age 7 years had either DCD or attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), or both.33 The children with DCD and those with both DCD and ADHD had poorer outcomes than their similarly aged peers without DCD and children with ADHD only. The children with DCD and those with both DCD and ADHD were found to have had more criminal offenses, more incidences of substance abuse and other psychiatric disorders, and lower levels of schooling. Treatment approaches used by occupational therapists and physical therapists can be broadly categorized into either bottom-up or top-down approaches (Tab. 1).10,12,34–36 Bottom-up approaches are based on hierarchical theories of motor control. These theories tend to explain the remediation of motor dysfunction through activation of higher levels of neuronal functioning in a child. The bottom-up approaches frequently used in managing children with DCD are sensory integration, the process-oriented treatment approach, and perceptual motor training.34 Summary of Bottom-Up Versus Top-Down Approaches Summary of Bottom-Up Versus Top-Down Approaches In sensory integration therapy, the child is provided sensory stimulation designed to promote motor development and higher cortical learning. A child undergoing sensory integration therapy may show some gains in motor development, but these gains often do not generalize to functional skills.34 Kinesthesia (the perception of one's own body parts, weight, and movement) is integral to the acquisition of motor skills in process-oriented treatment approaches. Therapeutic intervention with process-oriented treatment is based on specifically designed kinesthetic training activities. As described by Laszlo and Bairstow,37 this approach has an inherent reward system built into it through its use of positive reinforcement, presentation of desirable activities within the capabilities of the child, and judicious progression of the level of difficulty. The usefulness of the process-oriented treatment approach has been the subject of considerable study.9,10,37,38 Sims and colleagues35 suggested that much of the success of this approach can be attributed to a strong motivation effect, fostered by positive feedback and a sense of self-competence. Perceptual motor training, an eclectic approach, offers the child with DCD a wide range of motor experiences along with ample opportunities to practice these skills. Often, in outcome studies, children who receive perceptual motor training are compared with children who receive either sensory integration therapy or process-oriented treatment. Children perceptual motor training have been found to demonstrate motor to or greater than those of children either sensory integration therapy or process-oriented perceptual motor training, process-oriented may promote learning through positive feedback and reinforcement, these do not and to the that top-down approaches approaches use a approach to motor skill development and have been influenced by the systems approach to motor learning and control. This approach suggests that motor skills from an interaction of many both internal and external to the approaches also the in which motor behavior intervention and approaches or are the 2 most commonly intervention on of a The theoretical for intervention in a child's motor performance is the result of learning on a specific Motor tasks are into with each and then to the Children with this approach have demonstrated gains in motor skills.34 approaches to motor development problem The approach strategy the to to the and perform the well did plan The child verbal to the to motor learning. In this approach, the as a by the child out how to his or her motor performance on various motor intervention, the results of studies of approaches are In one 10 children with DCD who were with a approach to motor development were compared with 10 children who were with a bottom-up The children were for and groups on various standardized motor tests 10 treatment However, children in the approach group motor skill and to better than children who were the bottom-up and the approach both provide repetition and practice of specific motor skills, and the approach has the of problem The greater success of top-down when compared with bottom-up be a result of the top-down inclusion of both and motor learning with for attention to and memory as the child in activities. The results of these studies, in to outcome measures of the different approaches in children with DCD, would that approaches that systems theory on sensory information being only part of the and motor learning theory be most effective for these 2 a brief of clinical the of various treatment approaches used with children with of Treatment Approaches for Children With Developmental approach to daily occupational performance treatment approach treatment group integration, perceptual motor, gross and fine motor integration Assessment Battery for Test of Motor Test of for of Motor and of of Treatment Approaches for Children With Developmental approach to daily occupational performance treatment approach treatment group integration, perceptual motor, gross and fine motor integration Assessment Battery for Test of Motor Test of for of Motor and of The neuronal group selection theory can provide a for interpreting the in outcomes among the various approaches. children with moderate to cerebral palsy have a limited repertoire of primary neuronal which children with DCD are believed to experience difficulty at the level of secondary variability, that is, in and the most efficient and effective for a normal development, experience a primary role in the neuronal group selection that the for and According to the neuronal group selection theory, this of motor skill during the of secondary variability as a result of of neuronal selection of specific neurons within each repetition of synaptic within and among neuronal and sensory synaptic which act in and cortical and subcortical and following to a variety of motor of these connections is dependent on sensory Bottom-up approaches such as sensory integration, process-oriented and perceptual motor training sensory experience, with less on processing and motor Although an intervention based on information processing may provide the experience to the most effective neuronal bottom-up approaches may not provide for motor practice of and goal-directed tasks in order to reinforce and establish these approaches less on the specific impairments to decreased coordination and more on the of that is, the among a number of structures and systems and the within which the is Treatment based on a top-down approach that provide the child the to in problem while afferent subcortical structures the feedback and to identify and the most efficient movement for the Because integration, internal of motor and appropriate motor at the level of secondary the on sensory rather than factors by the bottom-up approaches in part, be for the observed in outcomes following treatment. A number of motor learning theories have been proposed in an attempt to explain the through which are into more complex According to the motor control and learning theory proposed by and motor circuits that the and following long-term these and functioning neuronal circuits through practice, the child is to motor into more complex movements. and proposed 2 to such the first of which on sensory to neuronal is during the second that the to the specific motor tasks through the and involving the and in the first of learning requires attention and The motor then in the of learning through repetition and top-down approaches meet both of these bottom-up approaches information processing only. the and of the neural in children with DCD is a not Motor control are complex and on functioning of and motor only are children with DCD a group in terms of functional disabilities the specific of the problems observed can from one child to the Because of these an approach to the management of children with DCD is Developmental coordination disorder is a complex disorder 5% to of school-aged children. intervention, these children will to exhibit poor motor skills and show deficits in other as for may (1) the most appropriate level of intervention (2) which produce results that generalize to the and provide long-term in motor (3) what have on the child's motor and (4) motor skills to the that to the

Physical Therapy · review · 472 citationsread the source →

Heart rate variability

IN FOCUSHeart rate variabilityHarald M. StaussHarald M. StaussDepartment of Exercise Science, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa 52242Published Online:01 Nov 2003https://doi.org/10.1152/ajpregu.00452.2003MoreSectionsPDF (59 KB)Download PDF ToolsExport citationAdd to favoritesGet permissionsTrack citations the rhythm of the heart has not only fascinated cardiologists but also inspired poets and musicians. Indeed, the periodic beat of the heart was used to define the speed of music. In music notation, the traditional Italian term "moderato" originally referred to one beat of the measure per walking pace (76-80 paces/min) or heartbeat (∼72 beats/min). The use of the heartbeat to define the speed of music may imply that the periodicity of the beat of the heart is very constant. However, this is not necessarily the case. In fact, loss of heart rate variability can indicate severe cardiovascular diseases and reliably predict poor outcome of such conditions (18, 22, 27, 47a). This In Focus article reviews sources of heart rate variability, its role as a prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, and its application in estimation of cardiac autonomic nervous system activity. All of these topics have been addressed intensely in articles published in the American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology during the last two years. In healthy subjects, the sinoatrial node located at the posterior wall of the right atrium initiates each beat of the heart. Due to the unstable membrane potential of the myocytes located in this region, action potentials are generated periodically at a fairly constant frequency. This relatively constant frequency generated by the autorhythmicity of the sinoatrial node is modulated by many factors that add variability to the heart rate signal at different frequencies. According to the Task Force of The European Society of Cardiology and The North American Society of Pacing and Electrophysiology (47a) these frequencies are classified into 1) ultra-low frequencies (ULF; >5-h cycle length) that include the circadian rhythm (6, 9, 34, 54); 2) very low frequencies (VLF; >25-s cycle length) that are supposed to be affected by temperature regulation (1, 7, 34, 52, 54) and humoral systems (9, 36); 3) low frequencies (LF; >6-s cycle length in humans) that are sensitive to changes in cardiac sympathetic (and presumably parasympathetic) nerve activity (27, 30); and 4) high frequencies (HF; 2.5- to 6.0-s cycle length in humans) that are synchronized to the respiratory rhythm (5) and are primarily modulated by cardiac parasympathetic innervation (38).The most prominent oscillation in the ULF band of the heart rate spectrum is the circadian rhythm. The autonomic nervous system contributes significantly to circadian heart rate variability. Using long-term recordings in conscious rabbits, Barrett et al. (6) demonstrated a strong circadian rhythm in heart rate, mean arterial blood pressure, renal blood flow, and renal sympathetic nerve activity. The importance of this study is that it clearly demonstrates that sympathetic nerve discharges exhibit a strong circadian rhythmicity. The paraventricular nucleus of the hypothalamus (PVN) appears to play a central role in mediating the circadian rhythm of autonomic nervous system activity. First, GABAergic and glutamatergic neurons project from the suprachiasmatic nuclei of the hypothalamus (SCN) to spinal-projecting neurons of the PVN (12). The SCN is the major central oscillator that triggers the day/night cycle. It receives photic input from the retina (47) and drives many neuroendocrine, metabolic, autonomic, and behavioral circadian rhythms (14, 16, 21, 31, 35, 44, 46, 50). In addition, microinjections of the inhibitory neurotransmitter GABA into the PVN of anesthetized rats elicit dose-dependent decreases in renal sympathetic nerve activity, whereas bicuculline (a GABA antagonist) increases renal sympathetic nerve activity (56). Second, from the PVN, neurons project to the nucleus of the solitary tract (that integrates inputs from the baroreceptors), the nucleus ambiguus (origin of preganglionic parasympathetic neurons to the heart), the rostroventrolateral medulla (location of sympathetic premotor neurons), and the intermediolateral cell column of the thoracolumbar spinal cord (location of preganglionic sympathetic neurons). Thus PVN neurons can modulate autonomic nervous system activity by sending inputs to major sites of autonomic nervous system regulation. As an example, a pivotal role of the PVN for sympathoexcitation during parturition was recently demonstrated in sheep. The increase in sympathetic nerve activity that accompanies birth in maternal animals was prevented by stereotactic lesioning of the PVN (43). Taken together, a major component of the circadian heart rate variability is elicited by diurnal fluctuations in autonomic nervous system activity, generated by corresponding fluctuations of neuronal activity within the PVN, which depend on circadian inputs originating from the SCN.It has been suggested that thermoregulation affects VLF heart rate variability (10, 26). Cooling the heart causes bradycardia, a mechanism used in heart surgeries. Conversely, fever is known to increase heart rate. Raising body core temperature from 36.0 to 36.6°C caused an increase in heart rate by almost 40 beats/min in male subjects (1), whereas acutely reducing ambient temperature from thermoneutral conditions (35°C) to 29, 23, and 17°C, reduced heart rate from 400 to 250 beats/min in 8-day-old rats (7). In addition, lowering temperature in the isolated working rat heart from 37 to 31°C reduced heart rate from 332 to 215 beats/min and markedly increased heart rate variability (28), indicating that parts of the temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability are independent from the autonomic nervous system. In contrast to the tachycardia that accompanies acute elevations in temperature, chronically raising ambient temperature in adult rodents from a standard housing temperature of 21-23°C to thermoneutral conditions (29-30°C) reduced heart rate by roughly 50 beats/min in rats (34) and by 200-300 beats/min in mice (54). The authors of these articles (34, 54) suggested that standard housing temperatures are associated with cold stress that causes parallel activation of brown adipose tissue, cardiac, and vasomotor sympathetic drives that elicits nonshivering thermogenesis and tonically elevates heart rate and arterial blood pressure. These and other studies indicate that both direct effects of temperature on pacemaker activity of the sinus node (28) and indirect effects mediated via the autonomic nervous system (11, 25, 51, 55) mediate temperature effects on heart rate and heart rate variability. Thus fluctuation in temperature is an important source of heart rate variability that should not be underestimated. In a more recent study, this was taken into account by core body temperature correction of heart rate variability (3).Endocrine factors affecting heart rate variability include thyroxine, reproductive hormones, the renin-angiotensin system, steroids, and others. Chronic subcutaneous infusion of angiotensin II in rats markedly increased blood pressure and heart rate variability, expressed as standard deviation (9). In contrast, chronic corticosterone treatment is likely to reduce baroreflex-mediated heart rate variability, because baroreceptor-heart rate (39) and baroreceptor-renal sympathetic nerve activity reflex sensitivity (41) were blunted in chronically corticosterone-treated rats. Furthermore, an interaction between angiotensin II and glucocorticoids was recently described. Intracerebro-ventricular microinjections of angiotensin II AT1 receptor antagonists caused marked decreases in mean blood pressure and heart rate in rats chronically treated with corticosterone but not in control animals (40). This interaction is likely to take place in the central nervous system, because peripheral angiotensin II AT1 receptor blockade did not alter the effects of betamethasone treatment on blood pressure, heart rate, and baroreceptor-heart rate reflex sensitivity in newborn lambs (42).Adenosine is a substance less known to affect heart rate variability. It is produced locally in the heart (53) and binds to A1-adenosinergic receptors, which are among the earliest expressed G protein-coupled receptors in the heart (36). The A1-adenosinergic agonist N6-cyclopentyladenosine dose dependently reduced heart rate in murine embryos, whereas 1,3-dipropyl-8-cyclopentylxanthine, an A1-adenosinergic antagonist, increased heart rate (36). Adenosine also exerts central nervous system effects in various brain areas (15, 20). Microinjections of adenosine into the nucleus of the solitary tract of awake rats caused dose-dependent changes in heart rate: low doses (0.01 nmol) produced a bradycardic response, whereas high doses (2.5-5.0 nmol) elicited a tachycardic response (15). Thus adenosine may indeed be involved in the regulation of heart rate and modulate heart rate variability via local cardiac and central nervous system effects. It has been proposed that the intrinsic cardiac nervous system plays an active role in regulating cardiac function (4, 37, 45, 57). This nervous system consists of sympathetic and parasympathetic neurons and interconnecting local circuits (37). Neurons in the canine right atrial ganglionated plexus (RAGP) spontaneously generate activity even after chronic cardiac autonomic denervation (45). Right atrial neurons in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery generated spontaneous activity that was unrelated to the cardiac cycle but sensitive to changes in systemic arterial pressure, indicating that these neurons receive pressure-sensitive sensory inputs (4). In addition, it has been suggested that substance P acts as a neuromodulator and neurotransmitter in intracardiac ganglia of the guinea pig, modulates the response to vagal inputs, and triggers action potentials at the site of parasympathetic ganglia independent of acetylcholine (57). Furthermore, the right atrial (RAGP) and the posterior atrial ganglionated plexus (PAGP) appear to have different functions. Ablation of the PAGP reduced vagally mediated bradycardia by 26%, whereas RAGP ablation completely abolished this response. Inhibition of sympathetically mediated tachycardia by vagal stimulation was attenuated by ablation of either plexus (37). Thus parasympathetic efferent neurons are primarily located in the RAGP, whereas prejunctional parasympathetic-sympathetic interactions also involve neurons within the PAGP (37). The spontaneous activity of neurons in the intrinsic cardiac nervous system, even after cardiac denervation (45), suggests an active role of this system in regulating heart rate. However, the impact of the intrinsic cardiac nervous system on heart rate variability remains to be elucidated. The importance of the autonomic nervous system for heart rate variability in humans becomes apparent in patients following cardiac transplantation, in whom heart rate variability is markedly reduced (49). Although reinnervation is possible after months and years, initially transplanted hearts can be considered to be denervated. Thus the reduced heart rate variability in cardiac transplanted patients (49) underlines the importance of an intact autonomic innervation for spontaneously occurring heart rate variability. A major component of the chronotropic effect of the autonomic nervous system is linked to cAMP. Intracellular cAMP increases the inward current of Na+ (funny current, If), which determines the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization that precedes each action potential. The activity of adenylate cyclase and thus intracellular cAMP levels are increased by stimulation of sympathetic β1-adrenergic receptors and decreased (via a Gi protein) by stimulation of parasympathetic muscarinic receptors. Thus cardiac sympathetic innervation increases the rate of the slow diastolic depolarization and accelerates heart rate, while cardiac parasympathetic innervation elicits opposite effects. Interestingly, parasympathetic-mediated changes in heart rate occur much faster than sympathetic-mediated effects on heart rate (27, 30, 47a). As a result, cardiac sympathetic nervous system activity can only affect LF components of heart rate variability, whereas the parasympathetic nervous system can also modulate HF components. A hitherto unsolved question in this context is if the rapid heart rate response to parasympathetic stimulation compared with the slow effect of sympathetic inputs is due to 1) different kinetics of β1-adrenergic vs. muscarinic receptors, 2) different kinetics of adenylate cyclase vs. phosphodiesterase, the enzyme that cleaves cAMP, or 3) fast parasympathetic-mediated opening of KACh channels (via muscarinic receptors and a GK protein). Support for the latter possibility comes from experiments in the rabbit sinoatrial node that demonstrated that activation of KACh channels contributes to the initial slowing of heart rate as a result of vagal stimulation (8).On the basis of the different frequency response characteristics of sympathetic and parasympathetic modulation of heart rate, frequency analysis of heart rate variability is often used as a tool to determine "autonomic balance" or sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system activity (27, 47a). As an example, the wavelet transform was recently used to determine cardiac autonomic responses to reperfusion in patients with thrombolysis after coronary thrombosis. Depending on the location of the infarct, marked alterations in LF or HF spectral power of heart rate or in the LF/HF ratio was observed in all successful reperfusions (48).The HF component corresponds to the frequency of respiration and is driven by the vagus as indicated by the strong respiratory pattern of cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus (38). The LF component has been ascribed to sympathetic modulation of cardiac pacemaker activity, because a variety of studies demonstrated that acute interventions that increase sympathetic nervous system activity, such as orthostatic perturbations (17, 19, 33), mental stress (32), or handgrip exercise (13, 24) increases LF spectral power of heart rate (27, 30). In addition to acute perturbations of cardiac sympathetic nerve activity, feedback oscillations generated by the baroreceptor reflex also appear to contribute to LF spectral power of heart rate as it was demonstrated that sinoaortic denervation markedly reduces the LF component (27, 30). Despite the strong modulation of heart rate by the autonomic nervous system, the LF and HF spectral components of heart rate variability may not always be very reliable markers for cardiac sympathetic and parasympathetic "tone" (30). In a recent study, muscle sympathetic nerve activity was recorded together with heart rate variability during application of lower body negative pressure that is known to increase muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17, 33). At higher levels of lower body negative pressure (-15 mmHg), both muscle sympathetic nerve activity and relative LF spectral power of heart rate increased significantly, whereas HF spectral power decreased (17). These findings suggest that LF spectral power reflects cardiac sympathetic "tone." However, no correlation within subjects was found between changes in LF/HF ratio and muscle sympathetic nerve activity (17). Thus heart rate variability does not reliably reflect the sympathetic response to orthostatic stress. Respiration-related fluctuation of heart rate (respiratory sinus arrhythmia) is probably the most often investigated component of heart rate variability, as it is believed that this component reflects respiration-driven vagal modulation of sinus arrhythmia (27). In a recent study, Rentero et al. (38) recorded the electrical activity from cardiac vagal motoneurons in the nucleus ambiguus. Firing of these neurons was modulated by the central respiratory cycle. This and other studies support the view that respiratory sinus arrhythmia is generated by central coupling of the respiratory oscillator with autonomic centers in the brain stem. However, a mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling as a source of respiration-related heart rate variability has also been suggested (5). The Bainbridge reflex causes a tachycardia in response to hypervolemia. This reflex is initiated by atrial mechanoreceptors and uses efferent sympathetic and parasympathetic pathways to modulate heart rate in response to changes in central venous pressure (23). Thus respiratory changes in central blood volume cause corresponding respiratory fluctuations in cardiac autonomic nervous system activity via the Bainbridge reflex. Only the parasympathetic component of the efferent pathway of the reflex can contribute to respiratory sinus arrhythmia, because sympathetic actions on heart rate are too damped to follow the respiratory frequency. The gain and phase of the transfer function between respiratory changes in lung volume and R-R intervals of the ECG were calculated in human subjects during graded changes in central blood volume (5). At the respiratory frequency, the phase was -180 degree, indicating that an inspiratory increase in central blood volume was associated with a decrease in R-R interval (increase in heart rate). Furthermore, the gain of the transfer function at the respiratory frequency steadily increased with increasing central volumes (except at the highest volume). Both of these findings confirm the presence of the Bainbridge reflex in humans (5). Thus, in addition to the central coupling of respiratory oscillators with cardiovascular centers, the Bainbridge reflex may contribute to respiration-related heart rate variability by mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling. There is general agreement that low heart rate variability is an unfavorable prognostic marker for cardiovascular diseases, such as diabetic autonomic neuropathy, hypertension, myocardial infarction, and heart failure (18, 22, 27, 29, 47a). Heart rate variability (variance of R-R intervals) was reduced in patients with mild hypertension (29) compared with normal values (1,134 ± 202 vs. 3,466 ± 1,018 ms2) provided by the Task Force (47a). In the rat model of myocardial infarction-induced congestive heart failure, Francis and colleagues (18) reported loss of spontaneous heart rate variability 6 wk after coronary artery ligation. Interestingly, reduced heart rate variability was also observed in a rat model of depression that is based on chronic (4 wk) mild stress application (22). Because depression is an independent risk factor for coronary artery disease, this finding may realistically model a human disease process. The reduction in heart rate variability was abolished by β-adrenergic receptor blockade, indicating that the reduced heart rate variability in this model of depression is related to elevated cardiac sympathetic tone (22).In summary, heart rate variability is generated by multiple factors not exclusively limited to the autonomic nervous system. Specific frequency components of heart rate variability mirror acute perturbations of the autonomic nervous system but do not always reflect autonomic nervous system activity. Simple statistics of heart rate variability, such as the standard deviation of R-R intervals in the ECG, can reliably predict the prognosis of cardiovascular diseases.I thank Dr. R. McAllen for critically reviewing the manuscript. References 1 Aoki K, Stephens DP, and Johnson JM. Diurnal variation in cutaneous vasodilator and vasoconstrictor systems during heat stress. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R591-R595, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar3 Aoyagi N, Ohashi K, and Yamamoto Y. Frequency characteristics of long-term heart rate variability during constant-routine protocol. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: R171-R176, 2003.Link | ISI | Google Scholar4 Arora RC, Hirsch GM, Johnson Hirsch K, Hancock Friesen C, and Armour JA. Function of human intrinsic cardiac neurons in situ. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1736-R1740, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar5 Barbieri R, Triedman JK, and Saul JP. Heart rate control and mechanical cardiopulmonary coupling to assess central volume: a systems analysis. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: R1210-R1220, 2002.Link | ISI | Google Scholar6 Barrett CJ, Navakatikyan MA, and Malpas SC. Long-term control of renal blood flow: what is the role of the renal nerves? Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: R1534-R1545, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar7 Blumberg MS, Knoot TG, and Kirby RF. Neural and hormonal control of arterial pressure during cold exposure in un-anesthetized week-old rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: R1514-R1521, 2001.Link | ISI | Google Scholar8 Boyett MR, Kodama I, Honjo H, Arai A, Suzuki R, and Toyama J. Ionic basis of the chronotropic effect of acetylcholine on the rabbit sinoatrial node. Cardiovasc Res 29: 867-878, 1995.Crossref | PubMed | ISI | Google Scholar9 Braga and of on fluctuations and changes in blood pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and elicited of heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and modulation of sympathetic nerve activity to muscle in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and GABA mediate suprachiasmatic nucleus inputs to spinal-projecting paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and is not associated with of the exercise reflex in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google C, and Y. The effect of on the circadian control of human core body temperature is Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of adenosine receptors in the does not affect the in awake rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google JK, A, and circadian and during two Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and sympathetic nerve and heart rate spectral effects of lower body negative pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Francis Johnson and of heart failure after myocardial in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google A, and of lower body pressure on muscle sympathetic nerve activity response to Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Adenosine initial depression of in the rat in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google R, and and circadian phase in a diurnal the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Johnson alterations and autonomic in an model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google MA, and The interaction of the Bainbridge and in the conscious Res | ISI | Google A, and handgrip exercise arterial control of sympathetic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve regulation to is in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and in heart rate variability. J Physiol | ISI | Google and function and cardiovascular interactions and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and interval variability in isolated working rat hearts at various conditions and Res | PubMed | Google A, A, and and autonomic of in patients with mild Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Malpas SC. Neural on cardiovascular and Am J Physiol Heart Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and thermoregulation in and rats in a Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and effects on reflex responses to mental stress in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and reflex during orthostatic in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and and responses to and are in rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and and in a by cycle. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and of humoral heart rate regulation in the Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google Armour and within the intrinsic cardiac nervous system contribute to chronotropic regulation. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 285: 2003.Link | ISI | Google Rentero N, A, and McAllen of cardiac vagal motoneurons in rat nucleus ambiguus. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of heart rate in conscious rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google and central actions of angiotensin to increase arterial pressure. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulate control of renal sympathetic nerve activity. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and modulation of cardiovascular and autonomic function in role of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 280: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and Inhibition of sympathetic responses at birth in by of the paraventricular Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 283: 2002.Link | ISI | Google and JP. pattern of during acute and chronic in conscious adult rats. Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google Armour and of chronic cardiac on of canine intracardiac neurons in Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and levels and circadian rhythm of activity in the a model of Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 281: 2001.Link | ISI | Google and nerve response of suprachiasmatic nucleus and Am J Physiol Regul Integr Comp Physiol 2002.Link | ISI | Google

American Journal of Physiology-Regulatory, Integrative and Comparative Physiology · review · 309 citationsread the source →

Metastasis Suppressor Proteins: Discovery, Molecular Mechanisms, and Clinical Application

Clinically and experimentally, primary tumor formation and metastasis are distinct processes — locally growing tumors can progress without the development of metastases. This observation prompted the hypothesis that the molecular processes regulating tumorigenicity and metastasis are distinguishable and could be targeted therapeutically. During the process of transformation and subsequent progression to a malignant phenotype, both genetic and epigenetic alterations alter a cell's ability to perceive and respond to signals that regulate normal tissue homeostasis. A minority of tumorigenic cells accrue the full complement of alterations that enables them to disseminate from the primary tumor, survive insults from the immune system and biophysical forces, and respond to growth-promoting and/or inhibitory signals from the distant tissues and thrive there. Identification of genes and proteins that specifically inhibit the ability of cells to form metastases (e.g., metastasis suppressors) is providing new insights into the molecular mechanisms that regulate this complex process. This review will highlight: (a) the functional identification of metastasis suppressors, (b) the signaling cascades and cellular phenotypes which are controlled or modulated by metastasis suppressors, and (c) opportunities for translation and clinical trials that are based on mechanistic studies regarding metastasis suppressors. The identification of nm23, the first metastasis suppressor gene, provided functional evidence for the existence of genes that specifically regulate metastasis (1, 2). Subsequent to this initial discovery, researchers used in vivo studies to identify additional metastasis suppressors. These pioneering studies used an unbiased approach to identify such candidates by demonstrating that ectopic expression of the putative suppressor gene inhibited the development of spontaneous macroscopic metastases without significantly affecting primary tumor growth (3–5). Recently, this definition has been extended to include genes which specifically inhibit metastatic colonization (i.e., experimental metastasis formation using i.v. injection). The use of in vivo assays is required because in vitro assays are often of inadequate complexity to sufficiently model the entire process of metastasis. Furthermore, there are currently no in vitro models that allow the study of preferential growth within different target tissues. Table 1 lists the proteins which have bona fide metastasis suppressor activity in vivo (i.e., suppression of metastasis following ectopic expression into metastatic cell lines). It is interesting to note that metastasis suppressor activity for many of these genes would not have been predicted a priori based on their known cellular function(s). Furthermore, the unbiased, functional strategy identified novel genes for which no cellular function was known at the time of discovery. Metastasis suppressors can impart their suppressive activity at one or more of the steps in the metastatic cascade (6). For example, in vivo studies showed that metastatic cancer cells which express ectopic KISS1, JNKK1/MKK4, MKK6, MKK7, TXNIP, nm23-H1, or SSeCKS proteins could successfully disseminate and lodge at secondary sites, but are suppressed in their ability to colonize (i.e., form overt metastases) target tissues (7–12). After lodging at secondary sites, disseminated cells may die, persist as nondividing cells, or initiate growth (13). Such pivotal cellular decisions depend on both the expression of a specific gene profile as well as the activation status of key signaling pathways and the cumulative inputs of timing, amplitude, and duration of signaling responses. In short, cells expressing metastasis suppressors grow at primary sites, but fail to proliferate at secondary or metastatic sites, suggesting differential responses to site-specific external signals. Although the observation that a gene of interest functions as a metastasis suppressor is an excellent starting point, research is now focused on the biochemical and molecular mechanisms by which metastasis suppressor proteins execute their in vivo functions. Metastasis suppressors vary widely in their cellular locations and biochemical functions. Such proteins could display either extracellular (e.g., KISS1) or intracellular localization patterns. Within the cell, they are located in various cellular compartments, from the plasma membrane (e.g., cadherin, KAI1, CD44), cytoskeleton (e.g., RhoGDI2, gelsolin), cytosol (e.g., JNKK1/MKK4, nm23-H1, RKIP), mitochondria (e.g., caspase 8), and nucleus (e.g., BRMS1, CRSP3, TXNIP) (14–21).Cells respond to external stimuli by using a limited number of signaling pathways. Signaling specificity is achieved, at least in part, by combinatorial spatiotemporal activation of signaling proteins. The summation of these signaling events, enabled by a cell-specific gene expression profile, is a tailored, situation-appropriate response. During the process of transformation and progression to a malignant phenotype, both genetic and epigenetic alterations influence a cell's ability to perceive and respond to signals which regulate normal tissue homeostasis. The accumulation of such alterations during progressive rounds of cell division could endow a minority of tumorigenic cells with the ability to disseminate from the primary tumor. It is likely that as a result of these changes, metastatic cells are no longer bound by tissue-of-origin–derived signaling specificity and acquire the ability to modulate their responses to the changing environments encountered throughout the metastatic cascade. Current data supports a model in which ectopic expression of metastasis suppressor proteins may restore, at least in part, the endogenous signaling repertoire of earlier, more benign cellular generations, thereby blocking metastasis formation. In this light, metastasis formation can be viewed as the result of a cell's ability to respond to multiple growth milieus as opposed to being restricted to growth in the microenvironment of the tissue of origin. Defining pathways regulating metastatic growth requires the integration and interpretation of data obtained over experimental settings ranging from the molecular interactions of specific proteins, to communication between signaling networks within single cells, and ultimately cellular interactions among populations of cells that yield a particular disease state. This line of inquiry is a particular challenge in studies of metastasis regulation because of the complexity and diversity of downstream events that take place in metastasis formation. The majority of metastasis suppressors identified participate in highly conserved eukaryotic signal transduction pathways. Based on their known biochemical functions, we have divided the metastasis suppressors into four general signaling categories: cytoskeletal signaling, mitogenic pathways, stress-activated pathways, and survival pathways (Fig. 1). Although it may seem straightforward to place a metastatic suppressor into a linear signaling pathway, it is important to be mindful that these pathways are, in fact, dynamic networks that exist in series and parallel leading to crosstalk and interplay; phenomena known as emergent properties. The cytoskeleton is a dynamic structure that enables motility, deformability, and flexibility, while maintaining cellular architecture. For most nonhematopoietic cells, motility is an ancillary function; however, as a nonhematopoietic cell transitions from the benign to the invasive to the metastatic state, motility becomes an increasingly paramount ability. Without a dynamic actin cytoskeleton, a tumor cell would be incapable of intravasation or extravasation, and the cellular deformability is necessary to complete the metastatic cascade. Not surprisingly, several proteins involved in cellular motility have been implicated as metastasis suppressors. The Rho family of GTP-binding proteins, which include Rho, Rac, and Cdc42, are central players in the regulation of actin dynamics. The Rho-GTPase family consists of small 20 to 30 kDa monomeric GTP-binding proteins that bind GDP/GTP and hydrolyze GTP, leading to the activation of downstream effector molecules (22). In this signaling scheme, metastasis suppressors have been identified as upstream inhibitors of the Rho family (23), or downstream effectors (24). RhoGDIs inhibit Rho family members by impeding the dissociation of GDP from Rho proteins, thereby locking the Rho protein in its inactive state, preventing Rho proteins from interacting with effector targets, and/or sequestering Rho-GTPases in the cytosol (25). RHOGDI2 was shown to suppress experimental lung metastasis but not affect in vitro growth or in vivo tumorigenicity. The Src-suppressed C kinase substrate is a protein kinase C substrate with protein scaffolding properties that have been shown to be a negative regulator of Rho family members (26). Reexpression of Src-suppressed C kinase substrate suppressed secondary lung metastases in nude mice and increased cell-cell adhesion, yet had little effect on primary tumor growth (10). Furthermore, Src-suppressed C kinase substrate reexpression at physiologic levels suppresses podosome formation and correlates with the induction of normal actin cytoskeletal structures and cell morphology, but not with the inhibition of Src kinase activity in cells (26).The finding that RhoGDI displayed the ability to suppress metastasis suggested that the downstream molecules it inhibits may have metastasis-promoting activities. This hypothesis seems to hold true in that mice deficient in RhoC, a target of RhoGDI, displayed a marked decrease in metastasis potential (27). Furthermore, specific inhibition of a downstream effector of Rho, ROCK, decreased tumor cell invasiveness in vitro and reduced the dissemination of tumor cells implanted in the peritoneal cavity in vivo (28). RhoGDI2 has also been shown to regulate secreted growth factors such as endothelin 1 (ET-1), which contribute to metastasis and will be discussed below (29). This prometastasic activation of effectors downstream of the Rho family is not universal. Gelsolin is a downstream effector of Rac that regulates the length of actin via its filament severing and capping activities. Overexpression of gelsolin has been shown to inhibit metastasis in vivo (24). Counterintuitively, gelsolin is an indispensable protein of podosomes, which are thought to play an active role in tissue invasion and matrix remodeling through their regulation of matrix metalloprotease (MMP) activity (30, 31).Cell interactions with the extracellular matrix and with neighboring cells trigger numerous responses that have essential roles in the regulation of behavior and fate. Integrin-mediated cell adhesions provide bidirectional links between the microenvironment and the cytoskeleton. This crosstalk between a cell and its local environment occurs whether the cell is benign, malignant, or metastatic. In this light, the cytoskeleton serves as a conduit for the integration and processing of intracellular and extracellular information; however, changes in the cytoskeletal program during pathologic progression may alter how this information is integrated and processed. Two metastasis suppressors have been shown to have interactions with integrins. Connective tissue growth factor is a 38-kDa cysteine-rich heparin-binding protein which is a secreted growth factor that can bind to integrins on the cell surface (32). Ectopic expression of connective tissue growth factor inhibited metastatic colonization by lung cancer cells (33). In contrast, the KAI1 metastasis suppressor protein is a member of the tetraspanin family of proteins and has been shown to interact with a myriad of cell surface proteins including other tetraspans (i.e., CD9, CD81), integrins β1 and β2, MHCII growth factor receptors, and intracellular signaling proteins such as protein kinase C (34). It has been hypothesized that KAI1 modulates integrin and growth receptor signaling by accelerating the rate of internalization via a protein kinase C–dependent pathway, thereby modulating cell adhesion and cell migration (34). Furthermore, KAI1 has been shown to decrease the integrin- and ligand-induced activation of the receptor tyrosine kinase c-Met, and independently decreases integrin-induced Src activation. Both c-Met and Src are thought to be required for invasion (35). A final observation with respect to the involvement of integrins in metastasis suppressor activity concerns caspase-8 function. Loss of caspase-8 in neuroblastoma cells leads to increased survival and an increased incidence of metastasis. The induction of caspase-8-mediated apoptosis seems to be due to unligated integrins because decreased expression of unligated integrins enhanced cell survival (36–38).Claudin-4 is a component of tight junctions which form the most apical component of intercellular junctional complexes where they establish cell polarity and cellular functions such as permeability (39, 40). These intercellular junctions not only carry out adhesive functions but also contain crucial components of signaling pathways that regulate epithelial proliferation and differentiation. Complementary in vitro and in vivo studies identified claudin-4 as an inhibitor of invasion and metastasis in pancreatic cancer cells and a target of transforming growth factor-β and extracellular signal-regulated kinase (ERK) signaling (40, 41).RECK, a membrane glycoprotein that encodes a GPI-anchored glycoprotein harboring three protease inhibitor–like domains, has been shown to negatively regulate MMP-2, MMP-9, and MT1-MMPs in vitro, suggesting that it is an important regulator of extracellular matrix remodeling. Furthermore, RECK-null mouse embryos displayed markedly elevated MMP activity. Interestingly, RECK is down-regulated by Ras signaling, a commonly altered pathway in many malignant cells (42).The role of some putative metastasis suppressors is more complex. There are several of a protein as a metastasis suppressor in one model and a potential tumor suppressor in For example, is a glycoprotein that responses of the cell to their cellular Although it has been in the that of has been shown to suppress metastasis in the cancer system other have that may metastatic activity a of the invasion and of and has been suggested to be a is not the only protein to have an role in metastasis. are a of that cell-cell adhesion in various tissues in a function is controlled by its Both and seem to inhibit cell migration and the in vivo metastatic potential of cells other studies have suggested that may invasion It is important to note that cancer cells of tissue used in several of the The tissue specificity of metastasis suppressor function is with the and integration information through signal transduction is a secreted protein and is hypothesized to processing by The are known as or not be secreted in to its metastatic suppressor activity has yet to be at the identification of upstream of identified a metastasis suppressor activity for CRSP3, a of the receptor of cells with suppressed metastasis and was with an of providing a potential between these and metastasis regulation stress-activated protein and pathways in parallel to the protein kinase In to the of with and have been with cell and apoptosis in to and changes, and growth factor specifically either or The protein is a kinase that has been shown to and the and in to a of extracellular can function as a metastasis suppressor in both and cancer Complementary in vitro and in vivo assays showed that the kinase activity of is required for the suppression of overt metastases and is to Subsequent studies identified metastasis suppressor for and in and interest is the finding that in cancer signals through the of the pathway to suppress metastasis in cancer signals through the of the pathway to suppress metastasis In vivo studies that both and suppress the formation of overt metastases by the ability of disseminated cells to colonize the lung identification of a metastasis suppressor function for protein also or protein mechanistic between the to cellular and of metastatic ability. is an endogenous inhibitor of a component of a system that has been implicated in cancer progression The levels of in cells are by endogenous as the in to to and including The primary of cellular is the is through of membrane or in to to with molecular or thereby highly or a of events that result in cell and of metastasis. this and ectopic expression of modulates these events to suppress metastasis formation is currently pathway is by mitogenic such as growth growth or which receptor tyrosine and The of mitogenic factors to cell surface a series of that with the activation of various factors and proteins and regulation may at in this is through both the of a kinase for a as well as protein expression levels of regulation are by intracellular localization and with scaffolding or proteins. These events may be important for regulating metastatic In the of metastasis the protein with the by to and the kinase suppressor of Ras a protein that has a role in the regulation of Ras activity and activation of the pathway has been shown to regulate signaling, suggesting that metastasis suppression activity may be by the inhibition of signaling kinase inhibitor protein was identified as a metastasis suppressor gene in functions as a negative upstream regulator of signaling and kinase interact with at sites, and of either inhibits of the Both be in to inhibition may suppress metastasis by of metastasis suppressors, and are with the signaling The signaling pathway a key role in many of cell survival and 1 are of an inhibitory and a and signals from various cellular proteins such as and an integration for the activation of and downstream to a that a of downstream targets, the and also regulates a of target proteins that cell proliferation and survival The levels of are and several particular interest is the which to signaling metastasis suppressor protein has been with the of cells showed decreases in endogenous levels of (i.e., of This finding is with a model in which changes in signaling the ability of disseminated cells to survive in the and grow at secondary In contrast, expression of the metastasis suppressor is modulated by clinical is the finding that expression correlates significantly with in both and cancer and that the in as a significantly of and cancer survival either evidence from the cell molecular and genetic studies that the metastatic process requires many steps to The of only one in this of in vivo events the process and a This enabled the identification of metastasis suppressor proteins. the of the however, the is not as straightforward because which signaling in the metastatic process are is not have insights into this by metastatic colonization as the in the metastatic cascade that is from a of A clinical will this to of invasive are with metastatic and (i.e., These that many with invasive disease disseminated cancer cells at preventing the of disseminated cells into the metastatic (i.e., the process of would a for cancer This approach more at preventing cancer cells from the primary tumor for the that this process has place the is first with In where this process has not yet local such as and can the the for additional at the an for metastasis preventing the growth of disseminated tumor cells into an overt clinical metastasis or the metastases. the approach not the in hold disease in providing increased of the with both of these is the identification of at for disease that they may at metastatic that can be to this include both tumor as well as molecular of the primary tumor to the development of metastasis a it has been to of the disseminated tumor cells at a secondary as the and as being distinct from that at the primary with to the tumor tumor cells distinct in the primary and secondary sites, and these interactions can or include locally and as well as cell-cell interactions in environments such as the and these with the of metastasis suppressor protein one can to there are to metastasis suppressor proteins. The of these on of the leading to of metastasis suppressor protein For example, the gene is it that of a normal gene would be the In contrast, was secondary to suppressed for example, at the endogenous gene seem we will provide an of approach from that have the of the first identified metastasis a of metastasis suppressor protein function in disseminated tumor In many cancer is with metastasis that occurs A study used gene to and whether this would cancer metastasis in an model of this A cell line of metastatic potential to the by in vivo was used to the of reexpression on metastasis. of these cells, an expressing was This in expression of the gene in most of the tumor cells in in and was with a in the number of metastases and a of This of of the of induction as a approach The of this approach are also to the of which is a disease that the In with gene is and the with i.v. development from the also the of the metastasis gene but the approach reexpression of the endogenous gene as a the was to a that would expression and allow at to on at of the This of would a that is and with an and have been to For example, was to expression in a cell line elevated the expression of cells out an of the the that elevated the expression of metastatic cell is a used at in and as well as at in cancer Furthermore, elevated expression and inhibited colonization and this effect was through The effect of on the of expression was in an in vivo model system for the of metastases the cell line to lung mice to or in of mice to of The number of metastases mouse was reduced by to on the metastases in reduced by to in the inhibited the number and of metastases in this This in metastases was with reexpression in the lung a of in with metastases and and tumors is of gene expression alterations with of metastasis suppressor protein A would be that functional of metastasis suppressor proteins is with gene expression changes, and cellular Recently, this with the that of metastasis suppressor proteins is with the of was used to a novel These studies focused on RhoGDI2, a suppressor of metastasis in an model of cancer metastasis reduced expression was to be with decreased survival for with cancer that RhoGDI2 as a on the expression of genes and to identify such genes in a of the lung metastasis model and primary clinical of RhoGDI2 protein is currently they to proteins or pathways downstream of These genes required to be following the of RhoGDI2 protein from the cells, and be of being inhibited by or to the changes in gene expression following of RhoGDI2 expression in metastatic cells, several proteins including This finding was by the between RhoGDI2 expression levels and of in tumor (29). Furthermore, inhibition of the endothelin with of the endothelin receptor such as to metastatic suppression in cells deficient for RhoGDI2 (29). The endothelin has been shown to regulate tissue cell cell and remodeling also has on cells in the and lung important of cancer metastasis In to such may growth factor and factor and growth factor one in the proliferation of and cells tumor also a role for in metastases from and and supports a model in which cells, in providing a microenvironment for these that trials with endothelin may be for with cancer following of the primary The for its use in the from the effect these have had in preventing experimental metastasis. These however, not the of these in metastatic but this is yet to be The molecular shown between and RhoGDI2 is because of endothelin receptor A such as with clinical In fact, in with in a the most events and that is well In this there was no at to in other of was not by this the of this effector approach to other metastasis suppressor proteins could identify potential novel for in other for and during the of key of this

Clinical Cancer Research · review · 131 citationsread the source →

Exceptional longevity in men: modifiable factors associated with survival and function to age 90 years.

Background: Prospective data on nongenetic determinants of exceptional longevity are limited, and information on long-lived men and their functional status is particularly sparse. We examined modifiable factors associated with a life span of 90 or more years and late-life function in men. Methods: In this prospective cohort study of 2357 healthy men (mean age, 72 years) within the Physicians' Health Study (1981-2006), biological and lifestyle factors and comorbid conditions were assessed by self-report with baseline and annual questionnaires. Mortality and incidence of major diseases were confirmed by medical record review. Late-life function was assessed 16 years after baseline by the Medical Outcomes Study 36-Item Short-Form Health Survey. Results: A total of 970 men (41%) survived to at least age 90 years. Smoking was associated with increased risk of mortality before age 90 years (hazard ratio [HR]; 2.10; 95% confidence interval [CI], 1.75-2.51), and similar associations were observed with diabetes (HR, 1.86; 95% CI, 1.52-2.26), obesity (HR, 1.44; 95% CI, 1.10-1.90), and hypertension (HR, 1.28; 95% CI, 1.15-1.43). Regular exercise was associated with a nearly 30% lower mortality risk (HR, 0.72; 95% CI, 0.62-0.83). The probability of a 90-year life span at age 70 years was 54% in the absence of smoking, diabetes, obesity, hypertension, or sedentary lifestyle. It ranged from 36% to 22% with 2 adverse factors and was negligible (4%) with 5. Compared with nonsurvivors, men with exceptional longevity had a healthier lifestyle (67% vs 53% had <or=1 adverse factor), had a lower incidence of chronic diseases, and were 3 to 5 years older at disease onset. They had better late-life physical function (mean +/- SD score [maximum 100], 73 +/- 23 vs 62 +/- 30; P < .001) and mental well-being (mean score, 84 +/- 14 vs 81 +/- 17; P = .03). More than 68% (vs 45%) rated their late-life health as excellent or very good, and less than 8% (vs 22%) reported fair or poor health (P < .001 for trend). Regular exercise was associated with significantly better-and smoking and overweight with significantly worse-late-life physical function. Smoking also was associated with a significant decrement in mental function. Conclusion: Modifiable healthy behaviors during early elderly years, including smoking abstinence, weight management, blood pressure control, and regular exercise, are associated not only with enhanced life span in men but also with good health and function during older age.

Archives of internal medicine · editorial or comment · 143 citationsread the source →

A multimedia mobile phone-based youth smoking cessation intervention: findings from content development and piloting studies.

Background: While most young people who smoke want to quit, few access cessation support services. Mobile phone-based cessation programs are ideal for young people: mobile phones are the most common means of peer communication, and messages can be delivered in an anonymous manner, anywhere, anytime. Following the success of our text messaging smoking cessation program, we developed an innovative multimedia mobile phone smoking cessation intervention. Objective: The aim of the study was to develop and pilot test a youth-oriented multimedia smoking cessation intervention delivered solely by mobile phone. Methods: Development included creating content and building the technology platform. Content development was overseen by an expert group who advised on youth development principles, observational learning (from social cognitive theory), effective smoking cessation interventions, and social marketing. Young people participated in three content development phases (consultation via focus groups and an online survey, content pre-testing, and selection of role models). Video and text messages were then developed, incorporating the findings from this research. Information technology systems were established to support the delivery of the multimedia messages by mobile phone. A pilot study using an abbreviated 4-week program of video and text content tested the reliability of the systems and the acceptability of the intervention. Results: Approximately 180 young people participated in the consultation phase. There was a high priority placed on music for relaxation (75%) and an interest in interacting with others in the program (40% would read messages, 36% would read a blog). Findings from the pre-testing phase (n = 41) included the importance of selecting "real" and "honest" role models with believable stories, and an interest in animations (37%). Of the 15 participants who took part in the pilot study, 13 (87%) were available for follow-up interviews at 4 weeks: 12 participants liked the program or liked it most of the time and found the role model to be believable; 7 liked the role model video messages (5 were unsure); 8 used the extra assistance for cravings; and 9 were happy with two messages per day. Nine participants (60%) stopped smoking during the program. Some technical challenges were encountered during the pilot study. Conclusions: A multimedia mobile phone smoking cessation program is technically feasible, and the content developed is appropriate for this medium and is acceptable to our target population. These results have informed the design of a 6-month intervention currently being evaluated for its effectiveness in increasing smoking cessation rates in young people.

Journal of medical Internet research · 93 citationsread the source →

Yield of a Public Health Screening of Children for Islet Autoantibodies in Bavaria, Germany.

Importance: Public health screening for type 1 diabetes in its presymptomatic stages may reduce disease severity and burden on a population level. Objective: To determine the prevalence of presymptomatic type 1 diabetes in children participating in a public health screening program for islet autoantibodies and the risk for progression to clinical diabetes. Design, setting, and participants: Screening for islet autoantibodies was offered to children aged 1.75 to 5.99 years in Bavaria, Germany, between 2015 and 2019 by primary care pediatricians during well-baby visits. Families of children with multiple islet autoantibodies (presymptomatic type 1 diabetes) were invited to participate in a program of diabetes education, metabolic staging, assessment of psychological stress associated with diagnosis, and prospective follow-up for progression to clinical diabetes until July 31, 2019. Exposures: Measurement of islet autoantibodies. Main outcomes and measures: The primary outcome was presymptomatic type 1 diabetes, defined by 2 or more islet autoantibodies, with categorization into stages 1 (normoglycemia), 2 (dysglycemia), or 3 (clinical) type 1 diabetes. Secondary outcomes were the frequency of diabetic ketoacidosis and parental psychological stress, assessed by the Patient Health Questionnaire-9 (range, 0-27; higher scores indicate worse depression; ≤4 indicates no to minimal depression; >20 indicates severe depression). Results: Of 90 632 children screened (median [interquartile range {IQR}] age, 3.1 [2.1-4.2] years; 48.5% girls), 280 (0.31%; 95% CI, 0.27-0.35) had presymptomatic type 1 diabetes, including 196 (0.22%) with stage 1, 17 (0.02%) with stage 2, 26 (0.03%) with stage 3, and 41 who were not staged. After a median (IQR) follow-up of 2.4 (1.0-3.2) years, another 36 children developed stage 3 type 1 diabetes. The 3-year cumulative risk for stage 3 type 1 diabetes in the 280 children with presymptomatic type 1 diabetes was 24.9% ([95% CI, 18.5%-30.7%]; 54 cases; annualized rate, 9.0%). Two children had diabetic ketoacidosis. Median (IQR) psychological stress scores were significantly increased at the time of metabolic staging in mothers of children with presymptomatic type 1 diabetes (3 [1-7]) compared with mothers of children without islet autoantibodies (2 [1-4]) (P = .002), but declined after 12 months of follow-up (2 [0-4]) (P < .001). Conclusions and relevance: Among children aged 2 to 5 years in Bavaria, Germany, a program of primary care-based screening showed an islet autoantibody prevalence of 0.31%. These findings may inform considerations of population-based screening of children for islet autoantibodies.

JAMA · 216 citationsread the source →

Factors Influencing the Prevalence of Stunting Among Children Aged Below Five Years in Bangladesh.

Background: Poor nutrition during childhood impedes physical and mental development of children, which propagate the vicious cycle of intergenerational under nutrition. This paper is aimed at understanding the determinants of stunting among children aged 0 to 59 months in Bangladesh. Methods: The study used Bangladesh Demographic and Health Survey 2011 data and a multistage stratified cluster-sampling design. Anthropometric data (for height and weight) were collected and analysis was limited to 7647 children. Multiple binary logistic regression analysis was performed to assess the association of stunting with potential socioeconomic and demographic factors. Results: The prevalence of stunting has been found to be about 41% among children aged less than 60 months and higher in rural setting than in urban areas (43% vs 36%). Adjusted model revealed that several factors were influencing stunting. The children living in moderately food-insecure households had higher odds of becoming stunted (odds ratio [OR] = 1.27, 95% confidence interval [CI]: 1.05-1.54, P = .01) compared to the children living in food-secure households. The derived ORs of stunting for children delivered at institutions facilitated particularly by public (OR = 0.80, 95% CI: 0.67-0.96; P = .02) or private (OR = 0.81, 95% CI: 0.67-0.97; P = .02) sectors were less than for children delivered at home. Similarly, wealth index, exposure of mother to the mass media, age of child, size of child at birth, and parents' education were significantly associated with stunting. Conclusions: Moreover, the demographic characteristics and other indicators appeared to have significant influence in the prevalence of stunting. Public health programs are needed to avert the risk factors of stunting among children in Bangladesh.

Food and nutrition bulletin · 58 citationsread the source →

Feasibility of a Mobile Phone App and Telephone Coaching Survivorship Care Planning Program Among Spanish-Speaking Breast Cancer Survivors.

Background: Spanish-speaking Latina breast cancer survivors experience disparities in knowledge of breast cancer survivorship care, psychosocial health, lifestyle risk factors, and symptoms compared with their white counterparts. Survivorship care planning programs (SCPPs) could help these women receive optimal follow-up care and manage their condition. Objective: This study aimed to evaluate the feasibility, acceptability, and preliminary efficacy of a culturally and linguistically suitable SCPP called the Nuevo Amanecer (New Dawn) Survivorship Care Planning Program for Spanish-speaking breast cancer patients in public hospital settings, approaching the end of active treatment. Methods: The 2-month intervention was delivered via a written bilingual survivorship care plan and booklet, Spanish-language mobile phone app with integrated activity tracker, and telephone coaching. This single-arm feasibility study used mixed methods to evaluate the intervention. Acceptability and feasibility were examined via tracking of implementation processes, debriefing interviews, and postintervention satisfaction surveys. Preliminary efficacy was assessed via baseline and 2-month interviews using structured surveys and pre- and postintervention average daily steps count based on activity tracker data. Primary outcomes were self-reported fatigue, health distress, knowledge of cancer survivorship care, and self-efficacy for managing cancer follow-up health care and self-care. Secondary outcomes were emotional well-being, depressive and somatic symptoms, and average daily steps. Results: All women (n=23) were foreign-born with limited English proficiency; 13 (57%) had an elementary school education or less, 16 (70%) were of Mexican origin, and all had public health insurance. Coaching calls lasted on average 15 min each (SD 3.4). A total of 19 of 23 participants (83%) completed all 5 coaching calls. The majority (n=17; 81%) rated the overall quality of the app as "very good" or "excellent" (all rated it as at least "good"). Women checked their daily steps graph on the app between 4.2 to 5.9 times per week. Compared with baseline, postintervention fatigue (B=-.26; P=.02; Cohen d=0.4) and health distress levels (B=-.36; P=.01; Cohen d=0.3) were significantly lower and knowledge of recommended follow-up care and resources (B=.41; P=.03; Cohen d=0.5) and emotional well-being improved significantly (B=1.42; P=.02; Cohen d=0.3); self-efficacy for managing cancer follow-up care did not change. Average daily steps increased significantly from 6157 to 7469 (B=1311.8; P=.02; Cohen d=0.5). Conclusions: We found preliminary evidence of program feasibility, acceptability, and efficacy, with significant 2-month improvements in fatigue, health distress, and emotional well-being and increased knowledge of recommended follow-up care and average daily steps. Tailored mobile phone and health coaching SCPPs could help to ensure equitable access to these services and improve symptoms and physical activity levels among Spanish-speaking Latina breast cancer survivors.

JMIR cancer · 44 citationsread the source →

Factors associated with mental health outcomes in a Muslim community following the Christchurch terrorist attack.

Background: On 15 March 2019, a white supremacist terrorist attacked two mosques in Christchurch, New Zealand. Fifty-one people were killed and another 40 sustained non-fatal gunshot injuries. Aims: To examine the mental health of the Muslim community, and individual and exposure-related factors associated with mental health outcomes. Method: This is the baseline analysis of a longitudinal study of adults from the Muslim community interviewed 11-32 months after the shootings. It included a diagnostic interview (MINI), measures of sociodemographic factors, prior mental health, prior traumatic events, exposure in the attacks, discrimination, life stressors, social support and religious coping. Logistic regression models examined associations with mental health outcomes. Results: The sample comprised 189 participants (mean age 41 (s.d. = 13); 60% female), and included: bereaved, 17% (n = 32); injured survivors 12% (n = 22); non-injured survivors, 19% (n = 36); family members of survivors, 35% (n = 67); and community members without the above exposures, 39% (n = 74). Overall, 61% had at least one mental disorder since the attacks. Those bereaved (P < 0.01, odds ratio 4.28, 95% CI 1.75-10.49) and survivors, whether injured (P < 0.001, odds ratio 18.08, 95% CI 4.70-69.60) or not (P < 0.01, odds ratio 5.26, 95% CI 1.99-13.89), had greater odds of post-traumatic stress disorder. Those bereaved (P < 0.001, odds ratio 5.79, 95% CI 2.49-13.46) or injured (P = 0.04, odds ratio 4.43, 95% CI 1.07-18.28) had greater odds of depression. Conclusions: Despite unique features of this attack on a Muslim population, findings accord with previous studies. They suggest generalisability of psychopathology after terror attacks, and that being bereaved or directly experiencing such events is associated with adverse mental health outcomes. Trial registration number: The study is registered on the Australian NZ Clinical Trials Registry (ACTRN12620000909921).

BJPsych open · 3 citationsread the source →

Resilience, COVID-19-related stress, anxiety and depression during the pandemic in a large population enriched for healthcare providers.

COVID-19 pandemic is a global calamity posing an unprecedented opportunity to study resilience. We developed a brief resilience survey probing self-reliance, emotion-regulation, interpersonal-relationship patterns and neighborhood-environment, and applied it online during the acute COVID-19 outbreak (April 6-15, 2020), on a crowdsourcing research website ( www.covid19resilience.org ) advertised through social media. We evaluated level of stress (worries) regarding COVID-19: (1) contracting, (2) dying from, (3) currently having, (4) family member contracting, (5) unknowingly infecting others with (6) experiencing significant financial burden following. Anxiety (GAD7) and depression (PHQ2) were measured. Totally, 3042 participants (n = 1964 females, age range 18-79, mean age = 39) completed the resilience and COVID-19-related stress survey and 1350 of them (mean age = 41, SD = 13; n = 997 females) completed GAD7 and PHQ2. Participants significantly endorsed more distress about family contracting COVID-19 (48.5%) and unknowingly infecting others (36%), than getting COVID-19 themselves (19.9%), p < 0.0005 covarying for demographics and proxy COVID-19 exposures like getting tested and knowing infected individuals. Patterns of COVID-19 related worries, rates of anxiety (GAD7 > 10, 22.2%) and depression (PHQ2 > 2, 16.1%) did not differ between healthcare providers and non-healthcare providers. Higher resilience scores were associated with lower COVID-19 related worries (main effect F1,3054 = 134.9; p < 0.00001, covarying for confounders). Increase in 1 SD on resilience score was associated with reduced rate of anxiety (65%) and depression (69%), across healthcare and non-healthcare professionals. Findings provide empirical evidence on mental health associated with COVID-19 outbreak in a large convenience sample, setting a stage for longitudinal studies evaluating mental health trajectories following COVID-19 pandemic.

Translational psychiatry · 355 citationsread the source →

A review of patients with advanced cervical cancer presenting to palliative care services at Queen Elizabeth Central Hospital in Blantyre, Malawi.

Background: Cervical cancer is the commonest cancer affecting women in Malawi, which has the highest rate of this disease in the world. Most cases are diagnosed at an advanced stage. Aim: To describe the symptom burden, palliative care interventions, and outcomes of cervical cancer patients who entered care at Tiyanjane Clinic in Blantyre, Malawi, between January and December 2012. Methods: We reviewed the case files of 72 patients presenting to our hospital-based palliative care service over one year. Results: The mean age was 49.5 years. Twenty-six patients (36%) were HIV-positive and the majority of these (n = 22; 85%) were on antiretroviral medication at presentation to palliative care. Pain (n = 66; 92%), vaginal discharge (n = 44; 61%), and unpleasant odour (n = 37; 51%) were commonly reported. Over a third of patients (n = 26; 36%) reported pain in two or more sites. Fourteen patients (19%) reported vaginal bleeding. Spousal breakdown (through widowhood or divorce) was noted in over half (n = 41; 57%) of all cases. Pain relief was provided to 69 (96%) of the patients (morphine to 40 patients; 56%). Common interventions provided included metronidazole tablets (used vaginally), sanitary items, and counselling. At the end of the study period, 18 patients (25%) were still under the care of palliative services. Conclusions: Access to medications such as morphine, metronidazole and tranexamic acid can improve quality of life, even when radiotherapy is limited. Health care teams require necessary skills and training, including how to perform a comprehensive assessment, with an emphasis on the provision of psychosexual counselling, to assist with the complexity of symptoms occurring in this vulnerable group.

Malawi medical journal : the journal of Medical Association of Malawi · 24 citationsread the source →

Behaviour change techniques: the development and evaluation of a taxonomic method for reporting and describing behaviour change interventions (a suite of five studies involving consensus methods, randomised controlled trials and analysis of qualitative data).

Background: Meeting global health challenges requires effective behaviour change interventions (BCIs). This depends on advancing the science of behaviour change which, in turn, depends on accurate intervention reporting. Current reporting often lacks detail, preventing accurate replication and implementation. Recent developments have specified intervention content into behaviour change techniques (BCTs) - the 'active ingredients', for example goal-setting, self-monitoring of behaviour. BCTs are 'the smallest components compatible with retaining the postulated active ingredients, i.e. the proposed mechanisms of change. They can be used alone or in combination with other BCTs' (Michie S, Johnston M. Theories and techniques of behaviour change: developing a cumulative science of behaviour change. Health Psychol Rev 2012;6:1-6). Domain-specific taxonomies of BCTs have been developed, for example healthy eating and physical activity, smoking cessation and alcohol consumption. We need to build on these to develop an internationally shared language for specifying and developing interventions. This technology can be used for synthesising evidence, implementing effective interventions and testing theory. It has enormous potential added value for science and global health. Objective: (1) To develop a method of specifying content of BCIs in terms of component BCTs; (2) to lay a foundation for a comprehensive methodology applicable to different types of complex interventions; (3) to develop resources to support application of the taxonomy; and (4) to achieve multidisciplinary and international acceptance for future development. Design and participants: Four hundred participants (systematic reviewers, researchers, practitioners, policy-makers) from 12 countries engaged in investigating, designing and/or delivering BCIs. Development of the taxonomy involved a Delphi procedure, an iterative process of revisions and consultation with 41 international experts; hierarchical structure of the list was developed using inductive 'bottom-up' and theory-driven 'top-down' open-sort procedures (n = 36); training in use of the taxonomy (1-day workshops and distance group tutorials) (n = 161) was evaluated by changes in intercoder reliability and validity (agreement with expert consensus); evaluating the taxonomy for coding interventions was assessed by reliability (intercoder; test-retest) and validity (n = 40 trained coders); and evaluating the taxonomy for writing descriptions was assessed by reliability (intercoder; test-retest) and by experimentally testing its value (n = 190). Results: Ninety-three distinct, non-overlapping BCTs with clear labels and definitions formed Behaviour Change Technique Taxonomy version 1 (BCTTv1). BCTs clustered into 16 groupings using a 'bottom-up' open-sort procedure; there was overlap between these and groupings produced by a theory-driven, 'top-down' procedure. Both training methods improved validity (both p < 0.05), doubled the proportion of coders achieving competence and improved confidence in identifying BCTs in workshops (both p < 0.001) but did not improve intercoder reliability. Good intercoder reliability was observed for 80 of the 93 BCTs. Good within-coder agreement was observed after 1 month (p < 0.001). Validity was good for 14 of 15 BCTs in the descriptions. The usefulness of BCTTv1 to report descriptions of observed interventions had mixed results. Conclusions: The developed taxonomy (BCTTv1) provides a methodology for identifying content of complex BCIs and a foundation for international cross-disciplinary collaboration for developing more effective interventions to improve health. Further work is needed to examine its usefulness for reporting interventions. Funding: This project was funded by the Medical Research Council Ref: G0901474/1. Funding also came from the Peninsula Collaboration for Leadership in Applied Health Research and Care.

Health technology assessment (Winchester, England) · 428 citationsread the source →

Combat sports and wellbeing: advancing health and inclusion in athletes and practitioners. An opinion paper

Historically, combat sports have been predominantly conceptualized within the framework of elite competition, emphasizing physical aptitude, technical proficiency, and strategic execution (1-3). Despite their traditional and peculiar constitutions and developments, disciplines such as judo, karate, taekwondo, wrestling, fencing, boxing, and mixed martial arts have commonly been associated with high-performance athletes striving for competitive excellence on national and international stages (1, 4-6). However, contemporary discourse increasingly recognizes their expansive role in contributing to physical and psychological well-being, and social inclusion of the practitioners (7, 8). This paradigmatic shift underscores the capacity of combat sports to function as inclusive and accessible modalities for fostering multidimensional health benefits across diverse populations, including individuals with disabilities and other marginalized groups (9-13).The interdisciplinary exploration of physical activity and health highlights the intricate interrelationship between structured sports engagement and holistic well-being (14). Whilst conventional team and individual sports have long been acknowledged for their physiological and psychosocial benefits, combat sports exhibit distinct characteristics that might amplify these advantages (15, 16). Within combat sports, the synergistic interplay of rigorous physical conditioning, the cognitive engagement, adherence to rules, competition dynamics, respect, externalizing emotions regulation, are intertwined with pedagogical and philosophical values, thus presenting a unique framework for enhancing psychological resilience, cognitive adaptability, and emotional control. Consequently, the systematic practice of combat sports has been increasingly examined as a way of promoting mental health, stress modulation, and social cohesion (17, 18).The inclusive nature of many combat sports programmes further accentuates their relevance in dismantling stereotypes, facilitating integration, and fostering equity and social integration (19-21). In fact, they demonstrated significant adaptability to accommodate individuals with disabilities (e.g., physical impairments, developmental, emotional, intellectual disorders), thereby ensuring equitable access and fostering empowerment (9, 22). Adapted judo, para-taekwondo, and other modified combat disciplines provide individuals with disabilities a structured platform to engage in physical activity, cultivate self-efficacy, and develop meaningful social connections within a supportive and adaptive environment (23). From a public health perspective, the integration of combat sports within community-based health initiatives offers a compelling opportunity to engage populations that may not traditionally participate in structured physical activity programmes (7, 8, 19). The distinctive accessibility of combat sports, which cater to practitioners of all skill levels (e.g., from novices to elite athletes) sets them apart from many other sports. While their structured progression, adaptability, and emphasis on holistic development make them a viable option for lifelong and intergenerational participation (19, 24, 25), the mentorship and pedagogical frameworks cultivate positive role modeling, discipline, and intrinsic motivation, which are integral for sustaining long-term adherence to health-promoting behaviors (8).Furthermore, the intersection between combat sports and mental health has increasingly emerged as a focal point within academic and clinical research (17) with empirical evidence suggesting an association between participation and enhanced self-regulation and self-efficacy, and reduction in anxiety and depressive symptomatology (8, 26, 27). In necessitating sustained focus, adaptability, and emotional equilibrium, combat sports inherently require cognitive and affective demands, which align closely with established psychological frameworks that underpin mental well-being (28, 29). Moreover, the integration of mindfulness techniques, stress management strategies, and resilience-building paradigms within combat sports training substantiates their potential as a non-pharmacological intervention for addressing various mental health challenges (e.g., autism spectrum and oppositional defiant disorders) (30, 31).Despite these advantages, the discourse surrounding combat sports and well-being necessitates a critical examination of inherent risks and potential challenges. Issues related to injury risk, hypercompetitive environments, eating disorders, sexual harassment, and the psychological stressors associated with high-intensity training warrant careful scrutiny (32-36). The implementation of evidence-based injury prevention protocols, the establishment of ethically responsible coaching methodologies, and the promotion of safe training environments are imperative to ensure that the benefits of combat sports are maximized while minimizing adverse outcomes. Against this backdrop, this opinion paper seeks to examine the role of combat sports in advancing health and social inclusion among athletes and practitioners. Through a synthesis of contemporary empirical findings, theoretical paradigms, and applied insights, this paper aims to contribute to the evolving discourse on the potential of combat sports as a catalyst for holistic well-being. By delineating the multidimensional impact of combat sports on physical, psychological, and social health, this paper endeavors to underscore their transformative potential as an instrument for fostering individual and community well-being within different populations. DiscussionWhilst an expanding body of research and an evolution in scholarly discourse is recognizing the combat sports’ broader implications for holistic well-being (30, 37), a rigorous evaluation of the investigation methodologies, the validity of hypotheses, and the translational potential of recent findings is necessary to contextualize their significance within the sports and public health sciences, considering their strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (Figure 1).----------------------------------------ADD FIGURE 1 ABOUT HERE----------------------------------------Empirical evidence robustly shows the positive impact of combat sports on physical fitness, motor coordination, and cardiovascular health (3, 38). These benefits are attributed to the high-intensity, intermittent nature of combat sports training, which enhances aerobic and anaerobic endurance, muscular strength, and neuromuscular control (39). However, concerns regarding injury risk, particularly in striking and contact-intensive disciplines such as boxing, taekwondo, and mixed martial arts, necessitate continued research into injury mitigation strategies, particularly those targeting concussion and repetitive head trauma (6, 35, 40, 41). Moreover, many combat sports have developed styles with reduced or simulated contact to minimize injury risk. For example, the French "boxe éducative" emphasizing technique and control, penalizing any violent behaviors (42) and the value and application of kata (i.e., forms; prearranged, pattern practices) to learning and adopting judo technique in a safe way educating the athlete culturally, to enrich her/him as a person (43).Beyond physical health, recent studies highlight the psychological benefits of combat sports, including reductions in anxiety and depression and improvements in self-efficacy, emotional regulation, resilience, and stress management (27, 44-47). Therefore, combat sports-based interventions for individuals with mental health conditions have yielded promising outcomes (23). Despite these encouraging findings, variability in study designs, participant demographics, and intervention protocols limits their external validity, underscoring the need for further rigorously controlled investigations. Furthermore, some authors claimed that combat sport athletes might present symptoms of low energy availability and high anxiety levels associated with competition- and injury-related psychological stressors, deficits in executive functions and neuropsychological impairments associated with occurrence of concussions, disordered eating and eating disorders associated with weight-loss, and might suffer offensive, frightening, hostile, degrading, humiliating experiences, or sexual harassment, which urge safeguarding actions (32-36).The role of combat sports in fostering social inclusion has gained empirical support, particularly in programmes aimed at individuals with disabilities and marginalized communities (25, 48). For instance, a recent systematic review shows that judo interventions adapted for intellectual disabilities help improve social integration and self-perception and enhance participants' quality of life (49). The development of para-combat sports demonstrates enhanced physical and motor abilities while providing psychosocial benefits to various populations with different disabilities, promoting social integration, self-perception, and community belonging (50, 51). However, longitudinal research is needed to assess the long-term retention rates and sustainability of these benefits. Furthermore, there is a need of studies focused on the most appropriate adapted rules to achieve a fairer competition for ensuring a sense of success in individuals with physical, emotional, mental, hearing or visual impairments participating in adapted sports competitions at local, national, and international levels. Methodological approaches in combat sports research encompass experimental, longitudinal, qualitative, and systematic review designs. While randomized controlled trials remain the gold standard for establishing causality, their application in combat sports research is constrained by ethical concerns, logistical challenges, and the inherently dynamic nature of training environments (52, 53). Consequently, many studies rely on observational designs, which, despite their value in identifying associations, are susceptible to confounding variables and biases (24, 54).Qualitative methodologies have provided critical insights into the lived experiences of combat sports practitioners, offering perspectives on psychological and social dimensions that are often overlooked in quantitative studies (28). Ethnographic research has been particularly instrumental in elucidating the role of combat sports in shaping identity, discipline, and personal development (55). However, limitations in reproducibility and generalizability highlight the need for mixed-methods approaches to generate a more comprehensive understanding of combat sports' impact (25, 56).Additionally, the incorporation of biometric and neurocognitive assessments, such as heart rate variability analysis, functional MRI, and salivary cortisol measurements, has advanced our understanding of the physiological and psychological mechanisms underlying combat sports participation (47, 57, 58). Despite their objective precision, these techniques often face challenges related to cost, accessibility, and limited sample sizes, necessitating the development of scalable and cost-effective methodologies for broader research application. Finally, recent studies show that virtual reality (VR) technology and digital platforms are increasingly becoming part of combat sports training methods. Due to COVID-19 restrictions, martial arts schools and organizations implemented hybrid or online training models, which allowed athletes to stay engaged. VR boxing programmes provide users with virtual sparring simulations to enhance their motor skills without needing physical interaction. Initial results indicate that VR training enhances response behavior in karate athletes (59). Digital adaptations offer great potential, especially for people with limited mobility or remote locations. However, further studies are necessary to prove their enduring effects on physical health and psychological and social aspects (59-61).Strengths and Weaknesses of Scientific HypothesesThe hypothesis that combat sports confer multidimensional health benefits is strongly supported by empirical evidence spanning physiological, psychological, and social domains (8, 62-64). The integration of physical exertion, cognitive engagement, and structured discipline inherent in combat sports aligns with established theories of exercise psychology, neuroplasticity, and social identity formation (65, 66). This multidimensional perspective provides a robust theoretical foundation for advocating combat sports as a health-promoting activity. Nevertheless, several limitations warrant consideration. The heterogeneity of disciplines, which vary highly in intensity, contact level, and training methodologies, is often inadequately addressed in research, leading to overgeneralized conclusions (17, 39). Often underexamined, individual differences in personality, motivation, and previous trauma history may strongly moderate the psychological outcomes of combat sports participation (35, 67, 68).Additionally, a research focus is needed on concerns regarding the potential for adverse psychological effects (e.g., anxiety, depression, disordered eating behaviors, burnout, and decreased self-esteem), particularly in competitive environments where performance pressure, extreme weight-cutting practices, and aggressive coaching styles are prevalent (69, 70). Indeed, a balanced perspective that considers both benefits and risks is essential for the development of evidence-based recommendations (10, 71).Future DirectionsTo enhance the field, future research should prioritize well-structured longitudinal studies that assess the long-term impact of combat sports participation on physical, psychological, and social health. Standardization of outcome measures, intervention protocols, and participant demographics would facilitate cross-study comparisons and strengthen the reliability of findings (72, 73). Moreover, interdisciplinary collaborations incorporating sports science, psychology, and sociology could provide a more holistic perspective on combat sports' broader implications on practitioners (74).From a policy perspective, to yield valuable insights into combat sports’ practical applications research should investigate their efficacy within public health, educational, and rehabilitation initiatives, particularly for underserved and vulnerable populations (23, 75, 76).Furthermore, while safety remains a primary concern, advancements in protective equipment, training methodologies, education for athletes, coaches, referees and tournament directors, and regulatory frameworks should be continually evaluated to optimize benefits while mitigating risks (40, 41, 58, 77, 78). Ethical considerations, particularly concerning athlete well-being and inclusive participation, should remain a central focus in both research and practical implementation (17, 34, 36).Therefore, key research challenges to be addressed are: 1. Injury risk and safety: a need for injury prevention strategies, especially for concussions and head trauma in striking sports. 2. Psychological wellbeing: risks of stress, anxiety, burnout, and negative self-perception in competitive environments. 3. Inclusion and accessibility: a need for more research on long-term social and psychological benefits for marginalized groups and individuals with disabilities. 4. Methodological limitations: lack of standardized protocols, variability in study designs, and limited reproducibility of findings. 5. Ethical and regulatory issues: concerns over coaching practices, extreme weight-cutting, and athlete wellbeing in high-pressure environments. 6. Technological innovations: more research required on the effectiveness of VR and digital training tools in combat sports. 7. Public health and policy: exploration of combat sports' role in health initiatives, rehabilitation, and educational programs. ConclusionThe evolving discourse on combat sports highlights their potential as a multidimensional tool for well-being promotion. While a substantial body of evidence supports their benefits, a critical examination of methodological limitations, scientific hypotheses, and practical applications is essential for further refine our understanding and enhance their effectiveness. Finally, this article makes a significant contribution not only to the field of martial arts but also to public health and sports psychology. Its interdisciplinary approach calls for scientific collaboration and methodological rigor, reinforces the need for evidence-based policies and can serve as a valuable guide for researchers and policymakers looking to integrate combat sports into strategies for promoting health and social inclusion.

Frontiers in Psychology · 12 citationsread the source →

Long-term family outcomes in grade 2 IDH-mutated glioma patients treated with awake-guided surgery: Biological, professional, and therapeutic interactions.

Background: Maintaining quality of life is a priority of the oncological management in IDH-mutated low-grade gliomas (IDHm-LGGs). Yet, family outcomes have received limited attention. This study aims to provide an overview of long-term family outcomes in IDHm-LGG patients. Methods: We retrospectively studied a consecutive cohort of IDHm-LGGs treated with awake functional-based resection (AwFR). The main outcomes were union/marriage, separation/divorce, and parenthood before/after surgery. We tested interactions with overall survival (OS), histomolecular data, therapeutics, occupations, and tumor locations. Results: A total of 538 patients were included (median age: 36 years [IQR: 30-44], 1p19q-codeletion: 237 [44.1%], median follow-up: 7.7 years [95% CI: 7.1-8.3]). Unions/marriages were observed in 374 (69.5%) patients preoperatively and were maintained in 329(61.2%) patients. Separations/divorces were observed in 41 (7.8%) patients. A total of 44 (8.2%) patients had new child/children, and 48 (9.1%) had new unions/marriages. Family status was stable in 399 (74.2%) patients. Prolonged single status was predicted by age (OR: 0.94, 95% CI: 0.91-0.98), female gender (OR: 0.48, 95% CI: 0.25-0.91), and previous child/children (OR: 0.23, 95% CI: 0.11-0.45). Total resection predicted new union/marriage and/or new child/children (OR: 2.59, 95% CI: 1.04-7.10). Occupational skill level (OR: 0.27, 95% CI: 0.05-0.95) predicted stable union/marriage, while previous parenthood predicted separation/divorce (OR: 2.73, 95% CI: 1.07-7.83). Lesion-symptom mapping revealed that right pars orbitalis/triangularis infiltrations (Liebermeister measures, p corrected < 0.05, 10 000 permutations) were associated with separation/divorce. Family status did not impact OS, as assessed by multivariable proportional hazard and propensity matching-based survival analyses. Conclusions: This study offers a unique overview of the long-term family outcomes in IDHm-LGG patients. Critical interactions between familial, socio-professional, and oncological factors were highlighted. Despite the onset of the disease and the surgical approach, most patients had a stable family status.

Neuro-oncology advances · 1 citationsread the source →

Pre-Migration Trauma Exposure and Mental Health Functioning among Central American Migrants Arriving at the US Border.

In recent years, increasing numbers of families and individuals have arrived at the U.S. border from Central America, in particular, from Honduras, El Salvador, and Guatemala. This study sought to examine pre-migration trauma exposure and current mental health functioning of migrant families arriving at the U.S. border from the Northern Triangle region, with specific attention to the reasons offered for leaving their home country and the frequency with which migrant families appear to satisfy legal criteria for asylum We interviewed 234 adults in McAllen, Texas, using a structured interview and standardized questionnaires to assess exposure to trauma prior to migration, reasons for leaving their home country and symptoms of posttraumatic stress and depression. We found that 191 participants (83%) cited violence as a reason for fleeing their country, 119 individuals (69%) did not report the events to the police out of fear of gang-related retaliation or police corruption, and 90% (n = 204) reported being afraid to return to their native country. Based on self-report symptom checklists, 32% of the sample met diagnostic criteria for PTSD (n = 51), 24% for depression (n = 36), and 17% for both disorders (n = 25). Examining these data against the criteria for asylum in the U.S., we found that 70% of the overall sample (n = 159) met criteria for asylum, including 80% of those from El Salvador, 74% from Honduras, and 41% from Guatemala. These findings suggest that the majority of Central American migrants arriving at the U.S. border have significant mental health symptoms in response to violence and persecution, and warrant careful consideration for asylum status.

PloS one · 54 citationsread the source →

Sleep-related cognitive processes, arousal, and emotion dysregulation in insomnia disorder: the role of insomnia-specific rumination.

Objective: Insomnia-specific rumination has presented in subjects with insomnia. Research has identified hyperarousal as a key factor, with both trait and state components. It has been shown that emotion dysregulation also plays a role in insomnia. Hence, the aim was to investigate how insomnia rumination is associated with both trait- and state-dependent arousal and emotion dysregulation in insomnia. Methods: Sixty-eight subjects with insomnia disorder (DSM-5) and 36 good sleepers were evaluated using: Insomnia Severity Index (ISI), Daytime Insomnia Symptom Response Scale (DISRS), Arousal Predisposition Scale (APS), Pre-sleep Arousal Scale (PSAS), and Difficulties in Emotion Regulation Scale (DERS). Univariate and multivariate regression analyses and mediation analyses were performed. Results: Subjects with insomnia (F 41, mean age 50.2 ± 10) presented higher scores than good sleepers (F 22, mean age 49.7 ± 14) in all the scales (ISI, DISRS, APS, PSAS, DERS; p < 0.0001). Insomnia rumination was directly correlated with trait (APS, B = 0.22, p < 0.0001) pre-sleep state arousal (PSAS cognitive B = 0.22, p < 0.0001, PSAS somatic B = 0.24, p < 0.0001) and emotion dysregulation (B = 0.5, p = 0.03). It mediated the association between trait and pre-sleep state hyperarousal (Z = 3.3, p = 0.0008), the bidirectional association between cognitive and somatic arousal (p = 0.02), and the association between trait hyperarousal and emotion dysregulation (Z = 2.3, p = 0.04). Conclusions: In insomnia, specific rumination is related to both trait predisposition to arousal and to state-dependent arousal. It is also related to emotion dyregulation. Insomnia-specific ruminative response style may modulate the complex association between trait- and state-dependent arousal factors and arousal and emotion regulation in insomnia. In this framework, a broad range of cognitive processes may be considered when dealing with subjects with insomnia: the use of rumination-oriented psychological strategies could be important.

Sleep medicine · 64 citationsread the source →

Critical care staff wellbeing: A new paradigm for understanding burnout.

Background: The wellbeing of paediatric intensive care unit (PICU) staff members influences their engagement with work and the quality of care they provide to patients. Baseline burnout measures in research provide inconclusive evidence of the determinants of burnout and how to target interventions to promote staff wellbeing. Objectives: The objectives of this study were to determine the prevalence of burnout using the Maslach Burnout Inventory (MBI) burnout-engagement workplace profiles in a sample of Australian PICU staff and investigate associations between demographic characteristics, meaningful work, satisfaction with life, and psychological distress on burnout. Methods: A cross-sectional survey was administered to a multidisciplinary sample of PICU staff (target n = 464) from three tertiary paediatric hospitals in Australia. The survey tool was comprised of the MBI, Work and Meaning Inventory, Satisfaction with Life Scale, Kessler Psychological Distress Scale, and demographic questions. Hierarchical multiple regressions examined the relationships between burnout and these variables of interest. Results: A sample of 258 participants (56%) completed the survey. For most respondents, burnout was scored as a low to moderate risk, with over half the participants scoring low risk for emotional exhaustion (EE) (56%) and depersonalisation (DP) (54%). Personal accomplishment (PA) was more evenly distributed (range of burnout risk: low, 32%; moderate, 32%; high, 36%). MBI scores were classified using the burnout-engaged workplace profile system, identifying low levels of burnout (8% burnout, 3% disengaged, 21% overextended, 29% ineffective, and 39% engaged). Psychological distress significantly increased burnout risk across all three dimensions EE (β = 0.253, p < 0.001), DP (β = 0.145, p < 0.05), and PA (β = -0.13, p < 0.05), and being aged between 41 and 55 years was protective of depersonalisation (β = -0.214, p < 0.05). Conclusion: Utilising MBI workplace profiles, this study has built upon the demand for a more comprehensive assessment of burnout. Research that helps improve our understanding of contributory factors to burnout and wellbeing will inform the development of effective interventions that promote wellbeing of staff.

Australian critical care : official journal of the Confederation of Australian Critical Care Nurses · 2 citationsread the source →

Volunteering in Young Adulthood: Complex Associations With Later Health and Well-Being Outcomes.

Purpose: To investigate whether changes in volunteering from adolescence to young adulthood are associated with subsequent health and well-being outcomes in adulthood. Design: Longitudinal cohort study. Setting: National Longitudinal Study of Adolescent to Adult Health. Subjects: U.S. adults from Wave IV (2008/2009; N = 12,234) and Wave V (2016-2018; N = 9,971). Measures: Any volunteering and nine types of volunteering (independent variables) and 41 health and well-being outcomes (dependent variables) using an outcome-wide approach with multiple linear-, logistic-, and generalized linear regressions. Results: Volunteering in young adulthood was associated with better health behaviors (e.g., 34% decreased risk of binge drinking, 95% CI [0.54, 0.81]) and improved psychosocial and civic outcomes (e.g., lower depressive symptoms (β = -0.08, 95% CI [-0.14, -0.02]) in adulthood. Volunteering showed little evidence of associations with other health and well-being outcomes (e.g., loneliness, (β = -0.04, 95% CI [-0.09, 0.01])). Assessing volunteering by organization types showed a range of positive and negative outcomes. For example, volunteering in hospitals/nursing homes was associated with a 36% increased risk of high cholesterol (95% CI [1.06, 1.73]) and volunteering with political clubs was associated with a 52% increased risk of an anxiety diagnosis (95% CI [1.13, 2.05]). Conclusion: Our findings suggest more work is needed to determine the conditions under which volunteering is health promoting and to minimize potential adverse effects associated with some types of volunteering.

American journal of health promotion : AJHP · 5 citationsread the source →

Psychosexual health in gynecological cancer

The literature surrounding psychosexual health and cancer patients has primarily considered the functional aspects of the disease and its treatment at the major expense of the emotional sequelae. Sexual health is defined by WHO as: "a state of physical, emotional, mental, and social well-being in relation to sexuality; it is not merely the absence of disease, dysfunction or infirmity. Sexual health requires a positive and respectful approach to sexuality and sexual relationships, as well as the possibility of having pleasurable and safe sexual experiences, free of coercion, discrimination and violence" [1]. A principle goal of WHO is to assist its member states in achieving the highest attainable standard of health care for all, including sexual and reproductive health [2]. Global statistics show that the world's female population is carrying an overwhelming burden of need in this area. Over 200 million women cannot access modern contraception, and millions of women suffer rape, domestic violence, and sexual abuse, not only in the context of wars and criminal activities, but also in their own homes [2]. Although the physical sequelae of these disasters can be treated, such as treatment for sexually transmitted infections, the emotional impact can frequently be hidden, ignored, or may not reveal its impact until many years after the event. Any illness or traumatic life event, past or present, can lead to sexual problems in the lifetime of a woman, and gynecological cancer is no exception. It is the root cause or trigger for sexual difficulties in at least 50% of women affected [3]. In 2012, the estimated number of women living with gynecological cancers was over three million, which means that potentially 1.5 million gynecological cancer survivors could be affected by an associated sexual difficulty [4]. Within the context of gynecological cancer, many of these problems can be alleviated if recognized and acknowledged early in the cancer journey, therefore contributing dramatic improvements to a woman's overall well-being. It is now estimated that half of the population of either sex will develop cancer at some time in their life. Globally, 40% − 45% of women will have a sexual problem at some stage, with the prevalence increasing with age [5]. Between 10% and 90% of women with any cancer will have sexual problems [6] and over 50% of women with gynecological cancer will have either temporary or persistent sexual difficulties [3]. As diagnosis and treatments improve, the number of women surviving cancer will increase, and survivorship issues including quality of life have become increasingly important. Sexuality is a key component of most subjective measurable quality of life indicators [7]. Sexual function and enjoyment are important components of survivorship and should not be ignored. The most common sexual problems can be divided into two groups: problems of function and/or problems of desire. There is, however, a complex interplay of organic disorders with emotional and psychosocial issues, and these divisions are merely artificial. Formal definitions of female sexual dysfunction have been adopted, including the US classifications in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders [8], although having a sexual difficulty does not constitute having a mental health disorder. Basson et al. [9] published a useful classification of the problems. Such classifications are useful for research purposes, but may often be less helpful when treating women. The predominant functional female sexual problem is pain on sexual intercourse, or dyspareunia. Deep dyspareunia describes intracoital pelvic pain, and superficial dyspareunia is pain on vaginal entry. Either could signify organic disease, and should be appropriately investigated. If no pathology is demonstrated, and the pain persists, then an emotional cause must be considered and pursued. Vaginismus, or involuntary spasm of the pubococcygeal and related musculature, can prevent sexual intercourse taking place. Good history taking can clarify whether there has been any penetration of the vagina, not only penile, but by fingers, sex toys, or tampons. If not, this is diagnostic of primary vaginismus, and apart from close inspection of the vulva and offer of gentle digital vaginal examination to determine the extent of the vaginismus, no further clinical investigation is warranted. Women with gynecological cancer are more likely to have secondary vaginismus caused by pain experienced from the disease or its treatment, and fear of the pain occurring during sex [10]. Loss of libido or loss of sexual interest on the other hand is a problem of desire. There are no physiological markers for loss of desire when its origins are psychogenic, with psychosocial contributions, past and present relationships, traumas, and emotional factors all inhibiting the woman's wish to be sexual. One of the key ways to determine the origins of the sexual difficulty is to ask about the sexual and emotional relationship between the woman and her partner before the cancer diagnosis. It should not be assumed that problems are all due to the cancer, as long-standing relationship problems may be disclosed, and need to be incorporated into any counselling. The exception to this is the woman who suddenly becomes menopausal following cancer treatment, who had no problems with sex or desire prior to her cancer therapy. Appropriate standard therapy for her menopausal symptoms should be considered; however, the impact of a cancer diagnosis will be life changing, and drug treatment of hormonal deprivation symptoms may not be sufficient without some psychological or counselling support, or may be contraindicated as in the case of breast and endometrial cancer [11]. A diagnosis of gynecological cancer is overwhelming. While the instinctive professional response from clinicians is to ensure long-term survival, sexual issues are important for quality of life and should be considered in the decision-making process [12]. Sexual dysfunction is one of the most common and distressing consequences of cancer treatment [13]. Many treatments are shown to have sexual impacts, both positive and negative, and should be discussed fully with the woman pre-treatment so that she can make an autonomous decision about her care. Early offer of discussion of sexual issues in the cancer journey can lead to better sexual outcomes. Cervical cancer is the most common gynecological cancer worldwide. Cervical cancer survivors are at risk of sexual pain disorders, no matter which modality of treatment is used. A small study of patients who underwent radical vaginal trachelectomy for early stage cervical cancer showed sexual dysfunction, including loss of libido, for up to one year following treatment; however, by 12 months, sexual activity had reached that of healthy women [14]. Following radical hysterectomy for locally advanced cervical cancer, there was no significant difference in sexual activity and enjoyment between women with benign or malignant disease; however, the cancer group had worse problems than healthy controls with body image and vaginal functioning [15]. In women with advanced cervical cancer given chemoradiotherapy, pain during intercourse was in fact reduced after treatment [16]. This may have been a result of the resolution of bleeding, discharge, and pelvic pain. However, the anxiety surrounding cancer remains for many women. Women surviving up to 15 years following cervical cancer treatment showed poorer quality of life than healthy controls, and those who had received radiotherapy were significantly more affected by sexual dysfunction than those who had surgery alone [17]. Despite this however, orgasm may be unimpaired following radiation [18]. Many additional needs were expressed by women with cervical cancer; however, sexuality and intimacy came to the fore as a predominant issue for survivorship [19]. It has been known for some time that the physical and emotional impact of ovarian cancer can be devastating, leading to sexual as well as global quality of life issues [20]. One study has shown a prevalence of 63% for sexual difficulties among women with a diagnosis of ovarian cancer [3]. The effects of chemotherapy and surgery, combined with the anxiety about survival can have a dramatic negative effect on the woman's libido, and even women who undertake risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy can suffer sexual dysfunction [21]. Many of these women are totally unprepared for the devastating effects of sudden menopause, with hot flushes, vaginal dryness, and loss of libido replacing a previously healthy sex life. This could be helped by more realistic counselling before the procedure, and increased postoperative emotional support. One study has shown that women who had surgery for endometrial cancer had no differences in their own sexual experience postoperatively, but compared with healthy controls, they had more sexual difficulties overall [22]. Women with Lynch syndrome who opt for preventive surgery tend to be happy overall with the surgery, but are often unprepared for the physical adverse effects of menopause [23]. In contrast, Moldovan et al. [24] has reported that, despite sometimes debilitating menopausal symptoms, there were no significant sexual difficulties associated with the procedure. Vulvectomy is a common treatment for vulvar malignancy. This is increasingly affecting younger women, who are HIV positive. Women with vulvar cancer can have many years of difficulties with sex due to often distressing vulvar symptoms and bleeding. Following treatment they still suffer severe dyspareunia and body image distortion due to the effects of treatment. Although a recent study showed no differences in psychosocial and sexual functioning before and after vulvectomy, it was acknowledged that women with vulvar malignancy have a high risk for sexual problems compared with healthy controls [25]. Factors associated with postoperative sexual difficulties are increased age, poor overall physical and mental health well-being, and extent of the surgical excision [25]. This often elderly group of patients is usually neglected from the psychosexual point of view. The majority of the literature related to sexuality and cancer stems from high-resource countries. Although most of these studies encompass all women, there is a lack of good published evidence on the treatment of the sexual sequelae of cancer in relation to ethnic minority groups, within a majority culture [26]. Furthermore, data from low- and middle-income countries are scant. Much of the literature focuses on sexual distress and activity in relation to HIV and AIDS which, of course, is a global priority; however, this focus on infection transmission should not take away from the emotional needs of the woman who suffers from gynecological cancer. Sexuality research around the globe must be perceived and researched in terms of cultural, spiritual, ethnic, and religious contexts. Sexual problems in women with gynecological cancer may be associated with adverse effects of surgical, hormonal, and chemical treatments, as well as by the cancer itself. Fortunately, emotional, sexual, and quality of life outcomes improve as less morbid, more minimally invasive surgical treatments for gynecological cancers develop [12]. Chemotherapy-induced ovarian failure in cancer patients is associated with all the possible symptoms of a sudden menopause, combined with the emotional impact not only of the cancer, but loss of physical well-being and fertility all at the same time. Vaginal dryness can be a major problem to those women who wish to have sex [27], and appropriate vaginal moisturizers and lubricants can help. The issue of vaginal estrogen is still debated, but should be discussed with the patient, weighing up the risk − benefit ratio for each individual. Vaginal estrogen will, in most cases, alleviate the dryness, but there may be concerns about using hormones, especially in relation to breast cancer where the evidence is unclear. The scientific data, however, support the safety of low dose vaginal estrogen therapy [28]. It is not well understood that following a few weeks of vaginal estrogen, the vagina thickens and cornifies and estrogen is not absorbed as a result. Newer treatments such as selective estrogen receptor modulators have been used in place of vaginal estrogen in women without cancer [29], and may prove good alternatives in the future [30]. There are non-hormonal vaginal moisturizers and lubricants to make sexual intercourse more comfortable. Unfortunately, some commercial sexual lubricants can be hyperosmolar and could cause epithelial disruption, facilitating HIV transmission [31]. Simple lubricants such as olive oil or liquid glycerin have been used successfully in interventions to alleviate pain on intercourse due to vaginal dryness, combining their use with physiotherapy and psychosexual counselling. Treatments with pelvic external beam radiotherapy and/or with brachytherapy may cause vaginal shortening, tightening, and lack of pliability. The use of vaginal dilators to overcome these complications is widespread, despite lack of conclusive evidence, either for or against, either with or without a coating of estrogen cream [32]. Unsurprisingly, the intrusion of inserting a plastic (or sometimes glass) tube into a tender vagina after treatment is a task that may carry a deep psychological and emotional impact [33], and will have resultant poor compliance. Radiation oncologists agree that information about dilator use should be given before treatment [34], and that sufficient patient information and support are essential to improve compliance. Sensitivity to emotions and women's views and personal values in relation to sexuality are essential supports to encouraging dilator use [35]. Any of the above problems cannot fail to have an emotional impact on the woman and on her partner. Many sexual difficulties are automatically blamed on the organic disruption caused by cancer and its treatments; however, once any clearly indicated treatments have been given, in a sizable proportion of cases, the sexual difficulty will remain unresolved. Many sexual difficulties are psychogenic, and no amount of skilled clinical treatments will help if not linked closely to appropriate counselling, psychological, or psychosexual therapy. This form of intervention will enable the woman to expose and reflect on her sexual difficulties, in the context of her life and relationship not only since the cancer, but beforehand. This is often a time when past problems, such as childhood abuse, or problems with her current partner will surface. Some partners are disgusted by the physical impacts of cancer, and the relationship will suffer. On the other hand, some partners become more supportive and the cancer leads to stronger relationships [36]. Classic psychosexual therapy, using brief, focused psychotherapeutic techniques is the mainstay of treatment. It can be used with an individual or a couple, of any sexual orientation or cultural or religious background. This is a way of listening reflectively to the patient, so that they can gain their own insights into their sexual problem. The issue of genital examination is considered if relevant, as it enables the woman to connect with her genital area, and may trigger deep-seated thoughts or anxieties that the woman had blocked emotionally. This, of course, is a technique used only by clinicians who are qualified to examine the patient [37]. Clinical psychologists and counsellors trained in psychosexual work also treat women with sexual problems. Globally, because the availability of trained personnel differs, many simple innovative treatment interventions have been tried. A brief intervention using a well-accepted treatment, cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT), combined with sexual health education had positive results on patients who had risk-reducing salpingo-oophorectomy [21]. Psychosexual interventions work [38], and like all psychodynamic interventions only require a trained counsellor and a means of allowing access to the patient. The internet has enabled access to health care for many people around the world who are not able to travel long and difficult land journeys to direct provision of health care. An online intervention with a professional moderator has proven acceptable to gynecological cancer patients with a sexual difficulty [39], and another internet-based sexual difficulties intervention with counselling sessions proved more successful in improving sexuality issues than without a counsellor; however, there was no difference between the two groups in relation to emotional distress and quality of life [40]. Elsewhere, telephone interventions are being used, also with some success; however, it is clear that the knowledge, skills, and training of the health professional providing the intervention are relevant to the patient outcome. Multidisciplinary care should form the backbone of treatment of sexual difficulties in women with gynecological cancer, incorporating physical, psychoeducational, and psychosexual input. Team discussions, including clinicians, psychosexual therapists, and physiotherapists are well within the capabilities of many cancer centers, remembering that the patient and her partner are the focal point and should always be consulted. It is impossible to diagnose and treat a sexual problem if one does not acknowledge that it exists. Many studies in the past have identified lack of willingness of doctors and nurses to discuss sex, but sadly recent research has shown that not much has changed. For instance, in a cohort sample of 1154 US obstetrician − gynecologists, 60% did not ask patients about sexual problems [41]. Too often clinicians make value judgements about their patients including whether sexuality is an important part of their lives. Such assumptions may include biases about age, appearance, sexual preferences, and marital status of people who have sex. People with cancer and their partners have unmet sexual information and support needs [42], often due to the unwillingness of healthcare professionals to discuss sexual issues, even though they recognize it may be important to the patient. There are many barriers to talking about sex, affecting both the patient and the clinician, such as cultural background, and age and gender discrepancies between doctor and patient. There may be simple barriers, such as lack of privacy in a consultation, as often cancer patients are accompanied by family or close friends. Patients often state that they feel it is trivial to take up the doctor's time with non-life-threatening issues such as sex. Clinicians often cite lack of training as a reason that they are uncomfortable talking about sex and poor provision of this training has been noted [13]. Different models of communication skills training have been used and those undertaking the training have shown greater empathy and were more inclined to use open questions [43]. This technique of speaking to the patient in an open rather than interrogative manner can easily facilitate discussion of intimate issues. An even greater challenge in communication is the recognition that individuals are sexual beings up to the end of life. To some women in the palliative phase, sexual touch and closeness to their partner is of vital importance. Sadly this is rarely recognized and addressed by palliative care physicians [44]. It is important to remember that a minority of the female population identifies as lesbian, and that about 8% of the population is bisexual. While this should make no difference to the quality of sexual health care they receive, lesbians and bisexuals find it difficult to disclose their sexuality to clinicians, often inhibited by their cultural or religious background, and fears of facing discrimination [45]. If the clinician asks the patient at the outset if they have a sexual partner, and whether the partner is male or female, it will greatly enhance the quality of the doctor − patient interaction. Lesbian partners in particular can be very supportive during the cancer journey, and should be given the opportunity to be present if the patient wishes. Despite the recognized need for treatment of sexual problems in menopause and gynecological cancer, there is poor provision of specialist training to ensure that this important area of service provision is met [46]. Undergraduate teaching is important, but it is only by recognizing psychosexual medicine in formal gynecology or oncology training, as a compulsory requirement of the course, that this situation will begin to be addressed. Innovative online programs [47] can make a major impact on global training opportunities and give trainees around the world an opportunity to gain some skills and insight into treating sexual difficulties in a nonjudgmental way. Owing to the global prevalence of sexual problems associated with gynecological cancer, it should be within every gynecologist's or oncologist's duty of care to the patient to be aware of and have some understanding of how to diagnose and facilitate treatment for sexual problems in a nonjudgmental manner. This is true holistic medicine, recognizing not only the cancer, but the woman behind the symptoms, and requires awareness of the emotional, social, and relationship aspects of the patient's life. The ability of any person to enjoy a sexual life free of coercion, shame, disease, or pain in a consensual manner is a fundamental element of the human rights of women, and should be an unequivocally accepted as part of her gynecological cancer care. To make a difference, even in the absence of expensive and sophisticated cancer treatments, just acknowledging, listening, and offering support to the woman with sexual difficulties related to cancer will ultimately have a major benefit to her quality of life. The author has no conflict of interest. Please note: The publisher is not responsible for the content or functionality of any supporting information supplied by the authors. Any queries (other than missing content) should be directed to the corresponding author for the article.

International Journal of Gynecology & Obstetrics · 17 citationsread the source →

Time to pregnancy in subfertile women in German gynecological practices: analysis of a representative cohort of more than 60,000 patients.

Background: The aim of this study was to assess the time from the first subfertility diagnosis to pregnancy (TTP) and to elucidate factors influencing TTP for patients in German gynecological practices comprising a representative sample and provide a realistic picture of the current situation in Germany. Methods: The study collective included all women with first-time diagnoses of female infertility (ICD: N97) or unfulfilled desire for children (ICD: Z31) from the representative database (IMS Disease Analyzer). Demographic data on patients such as their age (ranges 18-25, 26-30, 31-35, 36-40 or 51-50) and information on previous pregnancies and births and concomitant diseases were collected. Data pertaining to 61,815 women from 433 gynecological practices in Germany with a first diagnosis of female infertility or an unfulfilled desire for children were analyzed. The period of data collection was between January 1, 2001 to December 31, 2012 (=144 months). The mean observation period for the patients after the first gynecological consultation was 1,420 days (=47.3 months), with a standard deviation of 879 days. Results: A total of 22,744 patients became pregnant during the first year of observation (36.8%). The highest cumulative pregnancy rate was seen in women between 18 and 30 years of age (74.8%). The older the women were, the lower the cumulative pregnancy rate became (18.1% in the group of 41- to 50-year-old women). Cox regression calculations showed that the following factors considerably impaired the chances of pregnancy: age, endometriosis, diabetes mellitus, ovarian dysfunction, PCOS, previous infection of the genitourinary tract. In contrast, a couple of factors were proven to increase pregnancy rates, namely previous use of hormonal contraceptives, private insurance, previous birth, previous pregnancy and progesterone therapy (at any time). Conclusion: Along with information about reproductive physiology, such as decreasing fertility with maternal age, counseling in daily practice should also include individual factors influencing fertility. It is of the utmost importance to further increase public awareness of the impact of advanced female and male age on the reproductive outcome so that people can make well-informed decisions on when to start a family.

Archives of gynecology and obstetrics · 9 citationsread the source →

Global, regional, and national burden of stroke and its risk factors, 1990-2019: a systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2019.

Background: Regularly updated data on stroke and its pathological types, including data on their incidence, prevalence, mortality, disability, risk factors, and epidemiological trends, are important for evidence-based stroke care planning and resource allocation. The Global Burden of Diseases, Injuries, and Risk Factors Study (GBD) aims to provide a standardised and comprehensive measurement of these metrics at global, regional, and national levels. Methods: We applied GBD 2019 analytical tools to calculate stroke incidence, prevalence, mortality, disability-adjusted life-years (DALYs), and the population attributable fraction (PAF) of DALYs (with corresponding 95% uncertainty intervals [UIs]) associated with 19 risk factors, for 204 countries and territories from 1990 to 2019. These estimates were provided for ischaemic stroke, intracerebral haemorrhage, subarachnoid haemorrhage, and all strokes combined, and stratified by sex, age group, and World Bank country income level. Findings: In 2019, there were 12·2 million (95% UI 11·0-13·6) incident cases of stroke, 101 million (93·2-111) prevalent cases of stroke, 143 million (133-153) DALYs due to stroke, and 6·55 million (6·00-7·02) deaths from stroke. Globally, stroke remained the second-leading cause of death (11·6% [10·8-12·2] of total deaths) and the third-leading cause of death and disability combined (5·7% [5·1-6·2] of total DALYs) in 2019. From 1990 to 2019, the absolute number of incident strokes increased by 70·0% (67·0-73·0), prevalent strokes increased by 85·0% (83·0-88·0), deaths from stroke increased by 43·0% (31·0-55·0), and DALYs due to stroke increased by 32·0% (22·0-42·0). During the same period, age-standardised rates of stroke incidence decreased by 17·0% (15·0-18·0), mortality decreased by 36·0% (31·0-42·0), prevalence decreased by 6·0% (5·0-7·0), and DALYs decreased by 36·0% (31·0-42·0). However, among people younger than 70 years, prevalence rates increased by 22·0% (21·0-24·0) and incidence rates increased by 15·0% (12·0-18·0). In 2019, the age-standardised stroke-related mortality rate was 3·6 (3·5-3·8) times higher in the World Bank low-income group than in the World Bank high-income group, and the age-standardised stroke-related DALY rate was 3·7 (3·5-3·9) times higher in the low-income group than the high-income group. Ischaemic stroke constituted 62·4% of all incident strokes in 2019 (7·63 million [6·57-8·96]), while intracerebral haemorrhage constituted 27·9% (3·41 million [2·97-3·91]) and subarachnoid haemorrhage constituted 9·7% (1·18 million [1·01-1·39]). In 2019, the five leading risk factors for stroke were high systolic blood pressure (contributing to 79·6 million [67·7-90·8] DALYs or 55·5% [48·2-62·0] of total stroke DALYs), high body-mass index (34·9 million [22·3-48·6] DALYs or 24·3% [15·7-33·2]), high fasting plasma glucose (28·9 million [19·8-41·5] DALYs or 20·2% [13·8-29·1]), ambient particulate matter pollution (28·7 million [23·4-33·4] DALYs or 20·1% [16·6-23·0]), and smoking (25·3 million [22·6-28·2] DALYs or 17·6% [16·4-19·0]). Interpretation: The annual number of strokes and deaths due to stroke increased substantially from 1990 to 2019, despite substantial reductions in age-standardised rates, particularly among people older than 70 years. The highest age-standardised stroke-related mortality and DALY rates were in the World Bank low-income group. The fastest-growing risk factor for stroke between 1990 and 2019 was high body-mass index. Without urgent implementation of effective primary prevention strategies, the stroke burden will probably continue to grow across the world, particularly in low-income countries. Funding: Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation.

The Lancet. Neurology · 5441 citationsread the source →

The impact of end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) on close persons: a literature review

Kidney disease is defined as end-stage when a patient's glomerular filtration rate has fallen to <15 ml/min/ 1.73 m2 [1]. Mortality associated with end-stage kidney disease (ESKD) is high [2]. The incidence of treated ESKD is rising in the western world, with a corresponding increase in the incidence of diabetes and cardiovascular disease, especially in ethnic minority groups. Survival on dialysis has been shown to be poorer in the older age group, especially in patients with increased comorbidity and in those whose functional status at the start of dialysis is poor [3]. Whilst renal transplant rates vary between different countries [4], the liberalization in the acceptance of older people into renal replacement therapy (RRT) programmes, together with changes in population demographics and the fact that kidney transplantation is less suitable for this group of older patients, means that dialysis may be the only treatment option available for an increasing number of patients aged 65 years and over [5]. Recent health policy changes in the OECD countries [6,7] acknowledge that end of life care may be more appropriate for some of these people, and maximum conservative management programmes (where residual renal function is supported, haemoglobin levels maintained and symptoms relieved) have been introduced into many renal units, particularly in the United Kingdom [6]. The onset of ESKD and subsequent recommendation of dialysis as a treatment option involves a change in lifestyle for both patients and close persons [8]. Even before end-stage disease is reached, as renal function deteriorates, patients frequently require additional support, and it is often family members who provide this [9]. In the UK it is estimated that 9 out of 10 carers of patients with either physical or neurological disabilities will be close relatives. In particular when home haemodialysis is undertaken, family members have been involved in supporting patients [10,11]. Studies have shown that good family support is associated with successful adaptation to dialysis and compliance with dietary restrictions [12,13]. Conversely, one of the main factors associated with patients discontinuing dialysis is patients’ perception that they have become a ‘burden’ to close family members [14]. There is therefore a need for health professionals to be aware of the important contribution that close persons make to the care of renal patients, to communicate effectively with them and to provide bereavement support for this group when appropriate [15]. The literature on close persons of patients with renal disease has identified two main areas of impact. Firstly, both haemodialysis and peritoneal dialysis may have a disruptive influence on family members’ social lives [16] and the structure of the week may be geared towards dialysis sessions. Secondly, some patients become frail and lose functional independence, leaving family members to provide greater physical support. Family members may have health and social care needs of their own that need to be addressed [16,17]. Qyinan [18] reported that close persons commonly felt overwhelmed and stressed, although this review was limited to an evidence base of four articles and considered home dialysis only. Campbell [19] used findings from the general carer literature to illustrate demands of ageing partners with ESKD. In other chronic illnesses such as stroke [20] or in palliative care for cancer and mental health [21], interventions aimed at providing family members with training to support patients with their rehabilitation, or to address unmet needs as a result of the patient's illness, have been developed and evaluated. Results have been mixed. In the case of stroke, carers in the intervention group experienced less depression and anxiety and better quality of life [20], whilst in the palliative care study, no statistically significant differences were found between the intervention and control group on carers’ psychological outcomes [21]. However, before such interventions can be developed in ESKD, it is important to understand better the emotional and physical needs of close persons. This review aims to identify all studies involving close persons caring for ESKD patients, to describe the main findings and critique the methodology. Specific attention has been paid to (a) studies exploring the impact of ESKD on close persons, in particular for those close persons where the patients are either withdrawing from dialysis or being provided with end of life care and (b) studies looking at the provision of health care for close persons. A literature search for relevant articles was conducted in five databases: Medline (1950–2006), Embase (1991–2006), CINAHL (1982–2006), PsycINFO (1970–2006) and AMED (1985–2006), employing the following key words: carers, caregivers, end-stage kidney disease, end-stage renal disease, haemodialysis, peritoneal dialysis and renal replacement therapy. These keywords were used both in word search options and exploded as thesaurus terms to obtain the maximum number of articles. The abstracts for each article were read to check for inclusion into the main review, using the following criteria: Published in peer-reviewed journals. Research studies with an introduction, a methodology and results section and a conclusion. Involve close persons, defined as either a family member or the person identified by the patient as an informal carer. By an informal carer, we mean a person who provides the majority of a patient's physical and emotional care needs and who is neither a volunteer nor in the employment of statutory services. Use a sample of close persons caring for adult ESKD patients (over 18 years). Non-English language articles were considered if the English translation of the abstract met the above criteria. Using these criteria, 334 articles were identified from the five databases (139 in Medline, 121 in Embase, 80 in CINAHL, 8 in AMED and 34 in PsycINFO). J.L. went through the abstracts of each of the 382 articles, of which 37 initially met the inclusion criteria. One was later excluded on closer inspection, as it was specifically a validation study of a fatigue severity scale. Of the remaining 36 studies, 16 exclusively looked at family members, 12 specifically at the patient-family dyad and 3 at the family-health professional dyad. Whilst the latter two types of studies did not concentrate solely on family concerns, we decided to include them in the analysis, because these findings further contribute to the limited number of studies in this field. Thirty-six studies were included in the review. Both J.L. and G.S. first went through the remaining 36 studies independently and extracted the following information for each study: the number of carers in the study sample, the RRT population they were caring for, authors’ definition of a carer, demographic details of the sample, patients’ dialysis history, caring history, study design, outcome measures used and main findings. J.L. and G.S. then met together to discuss these findings and obtain an initial consensus before meeting with A.B. and L.J. to obtain a final consensus. We undertook an exploration of the aims of these studies, their study design, the sample of participants and the outcome measures highlighted in the quantitative studies. The three main themes explored were (a) the impact of caring for a patient with ESKD on dialysis on close persons, in particular quality of life, psychological morbidity, close person responsibilities—which authors often referred to as ‘burden’ or ‘carer burden’—and their life situation; (b) the coping strategies employed by these close persons and (c) factors that influence psychological morbidity. No studies of health provision for close persons of patients with ESKD were identified. Four studies looking at end of life issues explored the following themes for close persons: (a) their perceptions of patients’ terminal symptoms; (b) their reasons for why patients decided to stop dialysis; (c) the long-term impact of patient death following dialysis cessation and (d) their perceptions of advance directives. End of life care may be provided by the renal multi-disciplinary team alone, or it may involve referral for specialist palliative care advice. Such advice is likely to include symptom control, attention to spiritual and psychological issues for patients and, where possible, involvement of their families in decision-making. Whilst most studies were interested in the direct impact on close persons only, one triangulated close person data with patient data. The majority of studies reviewed used a cross-sectional design; there was only one longitudinal study. Whilst most were quantitative (24/36), there were some qualitative studies (11/36) and one used a mixed methods approach. The total sample was predominantly female, with mean ages ranging from 41 to 68 years (analysis possible in only 18 studies). Sample sizes also tended to be small, with a median sample of 55 participants for the quantitative and 15 participants for the qualitative studies. Most of the sample was recruited in studies where associated patients were undergoing haemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis. Three studies also involved kidney transplant patients. Only five studies looked at close persons dealing with end of life issues or with patients withdrawing from dialysis. Many studies did not focus on close persons in their potential role as ‘informal carers’. Thirteen studies actively sought close persons who also considered themselves to be informal carers, of which eight provided full definitions of what they meant by this term. All studies included spouses as part of their sample, of which eight specifically concentrated on this group alone. Adult children were included in seven of these studies and parents in five. A wide variety of outcome measures were used to rate health-related quality of life, anxiety, depression, coping strategies and patient disease severity. Some studies used standardized outcome measures; others used simple self-rated tools. The most commonly used standardized measures were the Zarit Burden Interview [22] to evaluate the sense of carer responsibility (3/8), the Beck Depression Scale [23] to evaluate depression (2/5), SF-36 [24] to evaluate health-related quality of life (3/8), Jalowiec Coping Scale [25] to evaluate close persons’ use of coping strategies (3/3) and End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index [26] to evaluate patients’ disease severity (2/4). A breakdown of the country of origin for each study showed that over half originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada (7/36), with five originating from Australia and only seven from the European Union, of which only one was conducted in the UK. The remaining six studies came from the following countries: Japan (2/36), Brazil (2/36), China (1/36) and Turkey (1/36). The 36 studies have shown mixed results. They have mainly explored the following areas associated with caring for an ESKD patient: the impact on close persons and their social life and the factors affecting close persons’ psychological health. There have been very few studies looking at palliative care issues and these have primarily concentrated on dealing with end of life issues rather than the provision of supportive care in the pre-terminal phase. In only one study, close persons rated their quality of life as excellent and reported few pressures resulting from their carer responsibilities [27], whilst in all others, ESKD and dialysis were shown to increase the close person's sense of responsibility and lead to a poorer quality of life when compared with age-matched controls [28]. Close persons found living with an ESKD patient on dialysis stressful [29] and experienced increased fatigue [30]. The dominating effect of caring for an ESKD patient often led close persons to neglect their own health. For those who took time to have a break from their carer responsibilities, there were health benefits [31]. Other issues that close persons reported included isolation through the loss of social activity [30–36], life restrictions [36–38], increased workload, negative economic consequences [39,40], changed relationship with the patient [30,34] and sexual problems for spouses [41]. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (quantitative and mixed methods studies) CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; FES = Family Environment Scale; HD = Haemodialysis; IIRS = Illness Intrusiveness Ratings Scale; MAES = Marital Attitudes Evaluation Scale; NGQ = Norris & Groves Questionnaire; PAF = Physicians’ Assessment Form; PAIS = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness Scale; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; SwQoL = Swedish Health-Related Quality of Life Survey; VAS = Visual Analogue Scale; ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. Impact on family life (qualitative studies) CAPD = continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis; HD = haemodialysis; PD = peritoneal dialysis. The treatment modality may also have an impact on family members. Studies have highlighted that spouses of transplant patients were more assertive, self-sufficient and able to handle the physical, social and existential aspects of the illness better than dialysis spouses [33,42]. Despite these pressures, close persons recognized that they play a positive role in promoting patients’ well-being [11,43]. They recognized that health care professionals were important in providing support to discuss their problems [39] and would like to have more information about the care being provided to patients [44]. However, they also reported poor communication with professionals, felt that their needs were not always addressed [30,39,45] and felt themselves uneducated and poorly equipped to deal with the regimented lifestyle associated with the dialysis regimen [14]. Whilst some studies have shown that close persons display few signs of psychological distress [40,46–49], others have identified the following: Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. Caring and psychological health ABS = Affect Balance Scale; BDI = Beck Depression Inventory; BI = Barthel Index; CAPD = Continuous Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis; CAS = Clinical Anxiety Scale; CBI = Caregivers Burden Interview; CBS = Caregiver Burden Scale; CES-D = Center for Epidemiologic Studies Depression Scale; CID = Cognitive Index of Depression; DAS = Adjustment Scale; = = Anxiety and Scale; = Questionnaire; = Depression Questionnaire; = Questionnaire; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity Index; = End-Stage Renal Disease Severity = Family Questionnaire; = Scale; = = Index; HD = haemodialysis; = Scale; = Impact on Family Scale; = Jalowiec Coping Scale; = Scale; = of control of = Marital Adjustment = Marital Questionnaire; = Scale of = Psychosocial Adjustment to Illness PD = peritoneal dialysis; = Scale; = for and Family Scale; = Quality of Life Index; = Scale; = Inventory; SF-36 = Short-Form 36; = = Anxiety Inventory; = with Life Scale; = ZBI = Zarit Burden Interview. A negative between close persons’ psychological health and their sense of carer responsibility their use of coping strategies strategies that the symptoms of the of the the close person's age and the social and changes as a result of ESKD A positive between good mental health and the following a of of dialysis the of dialysis patients are on of social support and sense of carer responsibility The sense of carer responsibilities are if patients are in of living have less or comorbidity This was further in studies in patients home haemodialysis or transplant where close persons not anxiety or depression felt less by their carer responsibility and a quality of life to the age-matched population were found between levels of responsibility and other outcomes such as quality of life and The use of coping was found to have a negative with a positive with the number of years on dialysis Close persons were more likely to have negative towards patients if they no of the dialysis and a high of involvement with the caring whilst living in a We identified five studies that explored end of life only one specifically on close persons. This study the long-term impact of death on families when dialysis was found that most families felt that patients a good death as at and with close people and most family members showed only levels of However, carers and those with levels of caring responsibility for the did End of life care HD = End of life care HD = The remaining four studies on patient outcomes such as reasons for withdrawing from dialysis the quality of death the of close persons in ESKD patients’ to and care and use of advance as a in advance by patients, which the of treatment to be by health care a patient is to provide to that person's of These studies found that close persons that whilst most patients a many patients were to be in and from fatigue care family members in that patients’ were and most recognized the of living which they felt were health care professional Close persons were poorly for caring for a dialysis and patients did not to be a on their families [14]. They were also poor at both patients’ and for or dialysis No studies were identified for carers of patients with supportive care those on maximum conservative management The main of most studies included in this review is the of and of the demographic over half of the studies demographic details of close persons’ ages and or details of their relationship to patients of other relevant demographic such as employment status or social is and only seven studies the time that close persons as Whilst all studies the of dialysis half reported the of time a patient has been on with very few patients’ functional although carer studies in other that this has an impact on carers’ quality of life In only 18 9 qualitative and mixed methods study details of their sample of the quantitative studies included in the used cross-sectional and were predominantly Such studies are in exploring between are limited as they not to be only five studies provide the full details of sample it is therefore not possible to rates or the sample The sample sizes were with a median of 55 and details of were reported in only one study. the of the used to the different outcomes it to between the different studies. We identified that most studies poor of their methods and a of of their data Most used of family members with five studies using only one details of their studies with their studies with their one a of their their approach. One study no details of their the studies were poorly that the was and authors were as to to use qualitative data with the and of the qualitative data demographic of data and poor use of supporting This study reviewed the literature exploring the of close persons of patients with ESKD, from which can be the quality of and for the of in this Firstly, studies exploring end of life issues are with only four identified. these four studies are they that health are the time for informal carers to discuss patients’ about end of life care and, long-term distress of close persons resulting from the patients’ However, about such end of life issues close persons, and we studies in this Secondly, definitions of close persons were there were some differences identified between the different groups. the literature the that most close persons are to patients, the in to patients who were and those with family and relationship were not not all close persons to on the role of the informal carer, and the of this role can be a as illness review did not identify differences between informal carers and family carers in the outcome measures used included both the of differences may in their with ‘informal carers’ a more members’ may be as being more this needs further issues that need to be addressed the use of methodology were identified in the Most quantitative studies were and with no intervention studies being identified. Studies of demographic details and rates and all were cross-sectional with sample sizes that used standardized Whilst the use of standardized measures the of the the findings from cross-sectional studies are limited in that they can only between We the use of longitudinal methods in that would that between key be explored in more This would also into the long-term of close persons. In those studies using qualitative most used with poor and of demographic and social and Many authors used the ‘burden’ or ‘carer such terms may influence of the relationship between close person and was not they were by close persons to use the ‘burden’ or it was a by the authors to describe the responsibilities of Such and the of study findings the half of the studies originated from either the USA (11/36) or Canada This it to the results of these studies their to in the of health care provision in other there is evidence that the psychological health of close persons them to to care which in can the mental health of patients, we to identify studies in review that looked specifically at health close persons of patients with ESKD. review has identified in the literature that need to be is therefore to the relationship between health and close persons in to We would like to acknowledge for this review and for support in this of

Clinical Kidney Journal · editorial or comment · 83 citationsread the source →

Understanding nutrition, depression and mental illnesses

INTRODUCTION Few people are aware of the connection between nutrition and depression while they easily understand the connection between nutritional deficiencies and physical illness. Depression is more typically thought of as strictly biochemical-based or emotionally-rooted. On the contrary, nutrition can play a key role in the onset as well as severity and duration of depression. Many of the easily noticeable food patterns that precede depression are the same as those that occur during depression. These may include poor appetite, skipping meals, and a dominant desire for sweet foods.[1] Nutritional neuroscience is an emerging discipline shedding light on the fact that nutritional factors are intertwined with human cognition, behavior, and emotions. The most common mental disorders that are currently prevalent in numerous countries are depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, and obsessive-compulsive disorder (OCD).[2] The dietary intake pattern of the general population in many Asian and American countries reflects that they are often deficient in many nutrients, especially essential vitamins, minerals, and omega-3 fatty acids.[3] A notable feature of the diets of patients suffering from mental disorders is the severity of deficiency in these nutrients.[3] Studies have indicated that daily supplements of vital nutrients are often effective in reducing patients' symptoms.[4] Supplements containing amino acids have also been found to reduce symptoms, as they are converted to neurotransmitters which in turn alleviate depression and other mental health problems.[4] On the basis of accumulating scientific evidence, an effective therapeutic intervention is emerging, namely nutritional supplement/treatment. These may be appropriate for controlling and to some extent, preventing depression, bipolar disorder, schizophrenia, eating disorders and anxiety disorders, attention deficit disorder/attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADD/ADHD), autism, and addiction.[4] Most prescription drugs, including the common antidepressants lead to side effects.[4] This usually causes the patients to skip taking their medications. Such noncompliance is a common occurrence encountered by psychiatrists. An important point to remember here is that, such noncompliant patients who have mental disorders are at a higher risk for committing suicide or being institutionalized. In some cases, chronic use or higher doses may lead to drug toxicity, which may become life threatening to the patient.[4] An alternate and effective way for psychiatrists to overcome this noncompliance is to familiarize themselves about alternative or complementary nutritional therapies. Although further research needs to be carried out to determine the best recommended doses of most nutritional supplements in the cases of certain nutrients, psychiatrists can recommend doses of dietary supplements based on previous and current efficacious studies and then adjust the doses based on the results obtained by closely observing the changes in the patient.[4] When we take a close look at the diet of depressed people, an interesting observation is that their nutrition is far from adequate. They make poor food choices and selecting foods that might actually contribute to depression. Recent evidence suggests a link between low levels of serotonin and suicide.[5] It is implicated that lower levels of this neurotransmitter can, in part, lead to an overall insensitivity to future consequences, triggering risky, impulsive and aggressive behaviors which may culminate in suicide, the ultimate act of inwardly directed impulsive aggression. Depression is a disorder associated with major symptoms such as increased sadness and anxiety, loss of appetite, depressed mood, and a loss of interest in pleasurable activities. If there is no timely therapeutic intervention, this disorder can lead to varied consequences. Patients who are suffering from depression exhibit suicidal tendency to a larger degree and hence are usually treated with antidepressants and/or psychotherapy.[6] Deficiencies in neurotransmitters such as serotonin, dopamine, noradrenaline, and γ-aminobutyric acid (GABA) are often associated with depression.[6–11] As reported in several studies, the amino acids tryptophan, tyrosine, phenylalanine, and methionine are often helpful in treating many mood disorders including depression.[12–17] When consumed alone on an empty stomach, tryptophan, a precursor of serotonin, is usually converted to serotonin. Hence, tryptophan can induce sleep and tranquility. This implies restoring serotonin levels lead to diminished depression precipitated by serotonin deficiencies.[8] Tyrosine and sometimes its precursor phenylalanine are converted into dopamine and norepinephrine.[18] Dietary supplements containing phenyl alanine and/or tyrosine cause alertness and arousal. Methionine combines with adenosine triphosphate (ATP) to produce S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), which facilitates the production of neurotransmitters in the brain.[19–22] The need of the present paradigm is, more studies shedding light on the daily supplemental doses of these neurochemicals that should be consumed to achieve antidepressant effects. Researchers attribute the decline in the consumption of omega-3 fatty acids from fish and other sources in most populations to an increasing trend in the incidence of major depression.[23] The two omega-3 fatty acids, eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) which the body converts into docosahexanoic acid (DHA), found in fish oil, have been found to elicit antidepressant effects in human. Many of the proposed mechanisms of this conversion involve neurotransmitters. For instance, antidepressant effects may be due to bioconversion of EPA to leukotrienes, prostaglandins, and other chemicals required by the brain. Others hypothesize that both EPA and DHA influence neuronal signal transduction by activating peroxisomal proliferator-activated receptors (PPARs), inhibiting G-proteins and protein kinase C, in addition to calcium, sodium, and potassium ion channels. Whichever may be the case, epidemiological data and clinical studies have clearly shown that omega-3 fatty acids can effectively treat depression.[24] In depressed patients, daily consumption of dietary supplements of omega-3 fatty acid that contain 1.5-2 g of EPA has been shown to stimulate mood elevation. Nevertheless, doses of omega-3 higher than 3 g do not show better effects than placebos and may be contraindicative in cases, such as those taking anticlotting drugs.[25] In addition to omega–3 fatty acids, vitamin B (e.g., folate) and magnesium deficiencies have been linked to depression.[26–28] Randomized, controlled trials that involve folate and vitamin B12 suggest that patients treated with 0.8 mg of folic acid/day or 0.4 mg of vitamin B12/day will exhibit decreased depression symptoms.[27] In addition, the results of several case studies where patients were treated with 125-300 mg of magnesium (as glycinate or taurinate) with each meal and at bedtime led to rapid recovery from major depression in < 7 days for most of the patients. Previous research has revealed the link between nutritional deficiencies and some mental disorders.[232529–32] The most common nutritional deficiencies seen in patients with mental disorders are of omega–3 fatty acids, B vitamins, minerals, and amino acids that are precursors to neurotransmitters.[20232427283033] Accumulating evidence from demographic studies indicates a link between high fish consumption and low incidence of mental disorders; this lower incidence rate being the direct result of omega–3 fatty acid intake.[233132] One to two grams of omega-3 fatty acids taken daily is the generally accepted dose for healthy individuals, but for patients with mental disorders, up to 9.6 g has been shown to be safe and effective.[34–36] Majority of Asian diets are usually also lacking in fruits and vegetables, which further lead to mineral and vitamin deficiencies. The significance of various nutrients in mental health, with special relevance to depression has been discussed below. CARBOHYDRATES Carbohydrates are naturally occurring polysaccharides and play an important role in structure and function of an organism. In higher organisms (human), they have been found to affect mood and behavior. Eating a meal which is rich in carbohydrates triggers the release of insulin in the body. Insulin helps let blood sugar into cells where it can be used for energy and simultaneously it triggers the entry of tryptophan to brain. Tryptophan in the brain affects the neurotransmitters levels. Consumption of diets low in carbohydrate tends to precipitate depression, since the production of brain chemicals serotonin and tryptophan that promote the feeling of well being, is triggered by carbohydrate rich foods. It is suggested that low glycemic index (GI) foods such as some fruits and vegetables, whole grains, pasta, etc. are more likely to provide a moderate but lasting effect on brain chemistry, mood, and energy level than the high GI foods - primarily sweets - that tend to provide immediate but temporary relief. PROTEINS Proteins are made up of amino acids and are important building blocks of life. As many as 12 amino acids are manufactured in the body itself and remaining 8 (essential amino acids) have to be supplied through diet. A high quality protein diet contains all essential amino acids. Foods rich in high quality protein include meats, milk and other dairy products, and eggs. Plant proteins such as beans, peas, and grains may be low in one or two essential amino acids. Protein intake and in turn the individual amino acids can affect the brain functioning and mental health. Many of the neurotransmitters in the brain are made from amino acids. The neurotransmitter dopamine is made from the amino acid tyrosine and the neurotransmitter serotonin is made from the tryptophan.[5] If there is a lack of any of these two amino acids, there will not be enough synthesis of the respective neurotransmitters, which is associated with low mood and aggression in the patients. The excessive buildup of amino acids may also lead to brain damage and mental retardation. For example, excessive buildup of phenylalanine in the individuals with disease called phenylketonuria can cause brain damage and mental retardation. ESSENTIAL FATTY ACIDS Omega-3 fatty acids The brain is one of the organs with the highest level of lipids (fats). Brain lipids, composed of fatty acids, are structural constituents of membranes. It has been estimated that gray matter contains 50% fatty acids that are polyunsaturated in nature (about 33% belong to the omega-3 family), and hence are supplied through diet. In one of the first experimental demonstrations of the effect of dietary substances (nutrients) on the structure and function of the brain, the omega-3 fatty acids (specially alpha-linolenic acid, ALA) were the member to take part. An important trend has been observed from the findings of some recent studies that lowering plasma cholesterol by diet and medications increases depression. Among the significant factors involved are the quantity and ratio of omega-6 and omega-3 polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) that affect serum lipids and alter the biochemical and biophysical properties of cell membranes. It has been hypothesized that sufficient long chain PUFAs, especially DHA, may decrease the development of depression.[37] The structural and functional components of membrane in cells of brain which is a lipid-rich organ, include polar phospholipids, spingolipids, and cholesterol. The glycerophospholipids in brain consist of high proportion of PUFA derived from the essential fatty acids (EFAs), linoleic acid and α-linolenic acid. The main PUFA in the brain are DHA, derived from the omega-3 fatty acid α-linolenic acid, arachidonic acid (AA) and docosa tetraenoic acid, both derived from omega-6 fatty acid linoleic acid. Experimental studies have revealed that diets lacking omega-3 PUFA lead to considerable disturbance in neural function.[38] Studies by Marszalek and Lodish indicate that despite their abundance in the nervous system, DHA and AA cannot be synthesized by mammals de novo and hence they or their precursors have to be supplied through the diet and transported to the brain. During late gestation and the early postnatal period, neurodevelopment occurs at significantly rapid rates which make the supply of adequate quantity of PUFAs, particularly DHA, imperative to ensure neurite outgrowth in addition to appropriate development of brain and retina.[39] Bruinsma and Taren of University of Arizona College of Public Health, Tucson, USA explored the involvement of dieting-related psychological factors as potential confounders.[40] They discussed studies that have both supported and contested the proposition that lowering plasma cholesterol by diet and medications contributes to depression. Research findings point out that an imbalance in the ratio of the EFAs, namely the omega-6 and omega-3 fatty acids, and/or a deficiency in omega-3 fatty acids, may be responsible for the heightened depressive symptoms associated with low plasma cholesterol. These relationships may explain the inconsistency in the results of trials on cholesterol-lowering interventions and depression. On similar lines, dieting behaviors have been associated with alterations in moods.[41] Dietary omega-3 fatty acids play a role in the prevention of some disorders including depression. Their deficiency can accelerate cerebral aging by preventing the renewal of membranes. However, the respective roles of the vascular component on one hand (where the omega-3s are active) and the cerebral parenchyma itself on the other, have not yet been clearly resolved. The role of omega–3 in certain diseases such as dyslexia and autism is suggested. It was omega–3 fatty acids that participated in the first coherent experimental demonstration of the effect of dietary substances (nutrients) on the structure and function of the brain. Experiments were first of all carried out on x-vivo cultured brain cells (1), then on in vivo brain cells (2), finally on physicochemical, biochemical, physiological, neurosensory, and behavioral parameters (3). These findings indicated that the nature of polyunsaturated fatty acids (in particular omega–3) present in formula milks for infants (both premature and term) determines the visual, cerebral, and intellectual abilities.[16] VITAMINS B-complex vitamins Nutrition and depression are intricately and undeniably linked, as suggested by the mounting evidence by researchers in neuropsychiatry. According to a study reported in Neuropsychobiology,[42] supplementation of nine vitamins, 10 times in excess of normal recommended dietary allowance (RDA) for 1 year improved mood in both men and women. The interesting part was that these changes in mood after a year occurred even though the blood status of nine vitamins reached a plateau after 3 months. This mood improvement was particularly associated with improved vitamin B2 and B6 status. In women, baseline vitamin B1 status was linked with poor mood and an improvement in the same after 3 months was associated with improved mood. Thiamine is known to modulate cognitive performance particularly in the geriatric population.[43] Vitamin B12 (Cynocobalamin) Clinical trials have indicated that Vitamin B12 delays the onset of signs of dementia (and blood abnormalities), if it is administered in a precise clinical timing window, before the onset of the first symptoms. Supplementation with cobalamin enhances cerebral and cognitive functions in the elderly; it frequently promotes the functioning of factors related to the frontal lobe, in addition to the language function of people with cognitive disorders. Adolescents who have a borderline level of vitamin B12 deficiency develop signs of cognitive changes.[43] Folate It has been observed that patients with depression have blood folate levels, which are, on an average, 25% lower than healthy controls.[44] Low levels of folate have also been identified as a strong predisposing factor of poor outcome with antidepressant therapy. A controlled study has been reported to have shown that 500 mcg of folic acid enhanced the effectiveness of antidepressant medication.[45] Folate's critical role in brain metabolic pathways has been well recognized by various researchers who have noted that depressive symptoms are the most common neuropsychiatric manifestation of folate deficiency.[46] It is not clear yet whether poor nutrition, as a symptom of depression, causes folate deficiency or primary folate deficiency produces depression and its symptoms. MINERALS Calcium A recent study showed that selective serotonin uptake inhibitors (SSRIs) inhibit absorption of calcium into bones. In addition to this, the SSRIs can also lower blood pressure in people, resulting in falls which may lead to broken bones. Indiscriminate prescription of SSRIs by doctors and ingestion by patients at risk of depression or other mental health problems may put them at increased risk of fractures. Compounded by the fact that they may be aging and already taking other medications, may also predispose them to osteoporosis.[47] Chromium Many studies on the association of chromium in humans depression have been recorded[4849] which indicate the significance of this micronutrient in mental health. Iodine Iodine plays an important role in mental health. The iodine provided by the thyroid hormone ensures the energy metabolism of the cerebral cells. During pregnancy, the dietary reduction of iodine induces severe cerebral dysfunction, eventually leading to cretinism. Iron Iron is necessary for oxygenation and to produce energy in the cerebral parenchyma (through cytochrome oxidase), and for the synthesis of neurotransmitters and myelin. Iron deficiency is found in children with attention-deficit/hyperactivity Iron in the are critical during the development of the and in with the in the with its associated deficiency is associated with disturbance in the development of cognitive Research findings out that as many as men are This in and more with of more depression than during other times in their These indicate the of in the of depression since its deficiency is known to cause and depression. Iron deficiency is for instance, with depression, and rapid a was first and by in while an of the mineral The role of has been well known in a into its its for bipolar disorder with and The therapeutic use of also its as an in depression, disorder, disorder, eating disorders, and in certain of adequate has to be taken while the mood in the can be used in patients with and The use of during and in and geriatric population needs observation about its In a of the of identified at studies, which indicate that low intake is associated with mood studies with with other populations that mood and in the of studies have shown that levels are lower in those with clinical intervention research that can influence the effectiveness of antidepressant also the brain cells the potential damage by studies have revealed the potential of the for physical development and mental development may be due to deficiency of When children and with poor nutritional status are to alterations of mental and behavioral they can be by dietary but to certain It has been observed that, of diet and meal pattern can have or immediate or effects. Dietary deficiencies of and nutrients vitamins, and such as during aging may precipitate brain which may be due to for of diet and depression which is a of to a factor that is often linked to increased and premature of aging may play an important role in this, by reducing food intake or reducing food intake in to such factors as in and poor use of prescription drugs, and and occurring in the in both and due to to They suggest changes associated with mental disorders such as dementia and depression, and and as to the of depression, people are the alternative and complementary are by the for and as a of and health and that are not currently to be a part of health need to be aware that it is likely that a of their patients with bipolar disorder might use these interventions to be and safe or to research in and brain indicates the of pathways that can provide a of the association between nutritional nervous system, and function an psychological health status. These findings may lead to of the therapeutic of dietary intervention health and health depression and other psychological disorders.

Indian Journal of Psychiatry · editorial or comment · 409 citationsread the source →

Atypical Antipsychotics: CATIE Study, Drug-Induced Movement Disorder and Resulting Iatrogenic Psychiatric-Like Symptoms, Supersensitivity Rebound Psychosis and Withdrawal Discontinuation Syndromes

Chronic illness can result in chronicity of clinical practice. As we have moved away from prescribing classical antipsychotics and tricyclic antidepressants, issues remain with the use of atypical antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants that need to be addressed, namely, iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and supersensitivity psychiatric symptoms. An optimal maintenance drug treatment consists of regular attempts to reduce the dose by finding a minimal therapeutic dose, regularly asking the question of when to reduce or withdraw treatment and for which patients, and moreover, why it is difficult to decrease a given drug treatment. Recently, Falloon [1] proposed that maintenance pharmacotherapy in schizophrenia will depend on finally finding minimally effective doses through ‘extensive training in stress management’. In the long-term treatment of major depression, Fava [2] has hypothesized that antidepressants can aggravate the course of depressive illness. Lambert [3] recently suggested that ‘antipsychotic-switching syndromes’, which include discontinuation syndromes, are a ‘major barrier’ to adjusting antipsychotic treatment. In this paper, we propose that to achieve optimal maintenance treatment with antipsychotics, and to reduce or withdraw antipsychotics effectively, we must distinguish syndromes associated with discontinuing antipsychotics, such as supersensitivity psychosis, from true relapse. While the prevalence and incidence of drug-induced movement disorder(s) (DIMD) has continuously decreased with atypical antipsychotics, DIMD persist as do psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD, and these must also be identified and evaluated. Persistent DIMD have been found to be a predictor of the later emergence of tardive dyskinesia (TD) and supersensitivity psychosis [4]. At present, we need to determine the relative risk of iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes, DIMD and DIMD psychiatric symptoms resulting from atypical antipsychotics. Although atypical antipsychotics are now most commonly prescribed, a debate has emerged on the differences between classical and atypical antipsychotics following the results of the Clinical Antipsychotic Trials of Intervention Effectiveness (CATIE) study [5]. The question that comes to the forefront is why recent studies are no longer finding well-established differences between these two generations in terms of efficacy and DIMD. Reasons to explain why recent schizophrenia studies have found reduced drug and placebo differences were examined at the International Society for CNS Clinical Trials and Methodology Annual Mid-Year Conference [6]. While the fact must be considered that patients included in recent studies have less severe illness with symptoms that are better controlled than in past studies (likely due to earlier treatment), the issue that psychiatric symptoms specific to schizophrenia are not being adequately measured nor differentiated from psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD is crucial to answering this question. For example, it is hard to believe that in a recent review of psychomotor slowing in schizophrenia, the authors, when evaluating its effect on measurement and treatment research to improve cognition in schizophrenia (MATRICS), nearly completely ignored the influence of akinesia and DIMD on neuropsychological tests in schizophrenia and the importance of accurate DIMD measurements [7]. As we pursue this ongoing discussion, we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic association with a high prevalence of DIMD and increases in basal ganglia volumes [8], and now address how to prescribe atypical antipsychotics most effectively, by taking into account DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes. The first widely prescribed atypical antipsychotic, risperidone, was first approved in Canada in 1993 following the publication of the Canadian Multicenter Risperidone Study, which reported clear advantages of risperidone over haloperidol and the placebo, and significantly less appearance of DIMD with risperidone than haloperidol [9]. DIMD includes the 4 types of movement disorders induced by antipsychotics: parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia [10]. These findings were confirmed by the American Risperidone Study [11] and several other studies reporting greater efficacy of risperidone over classical antipsychotics in terms of cost-efficiency [12] and the clinical management of patients with schizophrenia [13,14,15,16,17]. However, the CATIE study [5] challenged these results. The CATIE study found that of the 4 atypical antipsychotics studied, olanzapine was the only atypical to be more efficacious than the classical antipsychotic perphenazine, and to be highly superior to risperidone for discontinuation of treatment, due to lack of efficacy [5]. Olanzapine is known to produce less DIMD compared to risperidone, therefore one would expect psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD to be less frequent with olanzapine than risperidone. The expected higher rate of DIMD-induced emergent psychiatric symptoms associated with risperidone would explain the CATIE results, showing risperidone to be significantly less efficacious than olanzapine [5], despite risperidone being known to be at least as efficacious as olanzapine for true schizophrenic symptoms. Furthermore, the rating scales used to measure DIMD did not find the well-established differences between the 5 antipsychotics for DIMD rates [5]. Thus, we propose that DIMD and DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms were confounded with true schizophrenic symptoms in the CATIE study. DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms could be classified into 3 types: (1) emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as akinesia inducing depression, akathisia inducing anxiety; (2) iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as akinesia confounded with psychomotor retardation, akathisia with agitation; (3) supersensitivity psychosis symptoms associated with DIMD. In the CATIE study, quetiapine (mean dose = 543.4 mg/day), which shares a low rate of DIMD with olanzapine, was also found to be significantly less efficacious compared to olanzapine, but in contrast to risperidone, this lack of efficacy could be due to psychiatric symptoms related to supersensitivity psychosis explained by quetiapine’s loose binding properties at the D2 receptor [18]. Patients taking quetiapine had a completion rate of 18% out of 329 patients, whereas in our 3-year prospective study of quetiapine monotherapy with a lower mean dose of 487 mg/day (thus less likely to develop therapeutic tolerance), the completion rate was 21.7% out of 23 patients; 6 of 7 patients who relapsed, after a minimum 3 months of stabilized quetiapine treatment, met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. Without distinguishing these DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms from symptoms due to the original illness, the major impact of atypical antipsychotics is on the reduction of DIMD and TD [10, 20,] and their beneficial effects on psychosis are masked by DIMD emergent psychiatric symptoms, including supersensitivity psychosis. We will review 4 multicenter trials, which include a total of 14,497 patients, to illustrate how psychiatric and schizophrenic symptoms are confounded with DIMD-associated psychiatric symptoms.TD epidemiology has changed significantly since the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, with a constant decline in its prevalence [10]. TD, classified as a DIMD, is a hyperkinetic, involuntary and purposeless movement disorder [10, 20]. Considered as the most significant side effect of classical antipsychotics, TD has been associated with antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics, and usually occurs after several years of treatment. Persistent TD can also occur after short-term exposure to classical antipsychotics and gastrointestinal neuroleptics even at low doses and for as few as 2 months [8,21,22,23], while reversible and withdrawal dyskinesias share properties with levodopa-induced dyskinesia [24]. We conducted several epidemiological studies of TD [4,25,26,27] and in 1975, using the National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) psychopharmacology criteria, we found a 31% prevalence of TD in 261 outpatients with schizophrenia [25]. We also evaluated these patients according to the Schooler and Kane research diagnostic criteria and found a 22% prevalence of TD. This variability of findings related to defining criteria complicates comparisons across studies [10]. In a 5-year follow-up study of 169 of the same patients [4, 25], 45% met the research diagnostic criteria for TD. In 1975, 131 of the 261 patients did not meet the research diagnostic for TD, and in 1980 treatment-emergent TD was found in 46 of the patients who did not have it in 1975, for a 5-year cumulative incidence rate of 35% and a mean annual incidence rate of 8.4%. When corrected for remissions, the mean annual incidence rate decreased to 2.9%. This incidence rate, which includes both patients who developed and remitted from TD over time, is similar to results found by other studies during the same time period [28, 29]. The cumulative incidence of treatment-emergent TD in the study by Kane et al. [29] was 12% after 4 years and 40% after 8 years of neuroleptic exposure, which is similar to our finding of an annual incidence rate (corrected for remissions) of 3% for classical antipsychotics. In a study carried out in 130 lithium-treated affective disorder patients previously, but less, exposed to antipsychotics, we found a TD prevalence of 9.2% [26], which was a quarter of the incidence reported in our previous studies on patients with schizophrenia who had greater exposure to antipsychotics. In this time period of classical antipsychotics, 2 meta-analyses (including mostly patients with schizophrenia) reported mean TD prevalences of 23% [30] and 20% [31]. In view of the fact that 58% of patients treated with classical antipsychotics will develop treatment-emergent TD after 10–15 years of treatment [4], and the known beneficial neuroprotective effects of atypical antipsychotics on TD [32] and on increased basal ganglia volumes induced by classical antipsychotics [8], we recommend the discontinuation of all classical antipsychotics due to their neurotoxic effects. In the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the following multicenter studies (n = 3,753) evaluated the incidence and prevalence of TD, using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale [20] and training videotapes as in the previous time period. In the first study, an annual TD incidence of 0.68% was reported prospectively in 725 patients with schizophrenia, treated with the long-acting injectable atypical antipsychotic risperidone [27, 33]. Treatment-emergent TD was found in 12 of 587 patients without dyskinesia at the baseline [33]; however, expert case assessment determined 7 cases (1.19%) of withdrawal dyskinesia (3 cases resolved, 4 cases unchanged), 1 case (0.17%) of reversible dyskinesia and 4 cases (0.68%) of persistent treatment-emergent TD. Of the patients with baseline dyskinesia, 28.4% improved, no longer met TD criteria and maintained this response [33]. This annual treatment-emergent TD incidence of 0.68% with atypical antipsychotics is only 22% of the annual incidence of 3% reported with classical antipsychotics [4]. In the second study, the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (67 centers in 11 countries) [34], 980 patients with schizophrenia, or schizoaffective disorders, taking an atypical alone (25.6%), a classical alone (31.5%) or both a classical and an atypical antipsychotic (42.9%) were included from March 19, 1998, to February 14, 1999, and TD was found at the baseline in 115 (12%) patients [27, 35]. Thus, after 10 years in the time period of both classical and atypical antipsychotics, the overall prevalence of TD decreased by at least twofold compared to our previous 1979–1988 studies with classical antipsychotics [4, 25], using the same definitions, Extrapyramidal Symptom Rating Scale and training videotapes. In the third study (baseline data from three Ris-Consta multicenter studies) [27, 36] carried out 1 year later, 2,048 patients were included from March 21, 1999, to December 15, 2000, and TD was found at the baseline in 209 patients (10.2%), using the same methodology. This study showed a further decrease in the prevalence of TD after an additional year of atypical use. This changing epidemiology of TD with atypical antipsychotics is confirmed by Correll et al. [37] in a systematic review of 1-year prospective studies with atypical antipsychotics, and by Jeste et al. [38] in a 1-year study of elderly patients treated with risperidone. In conclusion, following the introduction of atypical antipsychotics, the prevalence and incidence of TD have significantly decreased. However, the risk for TD still exists with both atypical and classical antipsychotics, and there is a need for continued surveillance of emerging cases of TD in patients taking antipsychotics [39], especially as the current debate continues on the differences in efficacy between these two generations of antipsychotics following results from studies such as the CATIE [5, 39]. Furthermore, Kane [39] has pointed out that newly trained clinicians using mostly atypical antipsychotics may not have had the same exposure to TD as previously trained clinicians.A high prevalence of all 4 types of DIMD (parkinsonism, dystonia, dyskinesia and akathisia) remains. In the Schizophrenia International Suicide Prevention Trial (n = 980), a prevalence of 57.5% of DIMD (n = 551 patients) was found [27, 35]. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048) [27, 36], 970 patients (47.4%) had DIMD at the baseline, which consisted of 778 patients with parkinsonism (38.0%), 285 patients with akathisia (14%) and 209 patients with TD (10.2%). Thus, nearly 1 patient out of 2 had a definite DIMD in this time period of classical and atypical antipsychotics. In addition, DIMD have been consistently associated with significant psychiatric symptoms as measured by the positive and negative syndrome scale (PANSS) [40, 41]. In the InterSept study (n = 980), which included patients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who were at risk of suicide, suicidality was associated at baseline with DIMD, parkinsonism, TD and akathisia, and depression was associated with TD and akathisia [27, 35]. Based on these results, we recommend routinely assessing DIMD in patients with schizophrenia with suicidal and depressive symptoms. In the Ris-Consta studies (n = 2,048), baseline DIMD were also significantly associated with the PANSS total score, positive, negative and anxiety/depression symptoms [27, 36]. Greater anxiety and depression were seen in patients with severer DIMD, akathisia and parkinsonism. Higher PANSS negative symptom rating was associated with parkinsonism and higher PANSS total scores were associated with akathisia. In this time period, these last two studies (n = 3,028) show that DIMD persists with atypical antipsychotics, and that patients with DIMD have significantly higher PANSS scores compared to patients without DIMD.These results are in agreement with findings from 2 other multicenter studies: the American CATIE study [5] and the European Schizophrenia Outpatient Health Outcomes (SOHO) study [42]. In the CATIE baseline data, patients with TD (n = 212) were found to have significantly more psychopathology than patients without TD (n = 1,098) as measured by the PANSS total score and PANSS general psychopathology subscale [43]. In the 3-year prospective SOHO study, emergent cases of TD were associated with greater overall psychopathology. An increase in clinical global impression overall symptom severity was longitudinally associated with cases of TD in patients without TD at the baseline (n = The SOHO and the CATIE studies have also examined other for TD. the CATIE and SOHO studies found that other DIMD were associated with TD the CATIE study showed that patients with TD had more parkinsonism akathisia while the SOHO study found that baseline symptoms TD our findings in a prospective study of TD [4]. In to reporting that the incidence of TD was lower in patients taking atypical compared to classical antipsychotics after 6 months the SOHO study showed that the incidence of TD was associated with the incidence of of drug-induced in is crucial to that there is a of DIMD with atypical antipsychotics, which are not and confounded with psychiatric symptoms rating scales used routinely in clinical to DIMD do not DIMD from psychiatric symptoms from the 4 multicenter (n = 14,497 patients) into this the CATIE the [27, the Ris-Consta [27, 36] and the SOHO studies have all confirmed the association of DIMD with psychiatric symptoms. most of the studies included in this measure psychiatric symptoms according to the we propose the following of PANSS psychiatric symptoms associated with emergent psychiatric symptoms caused by DIMD, such as depression and suicidality example, akinesia is known to produce depression, psychomotor and suicidal while akathisia psychomotor and suicidal and TD is also associated with suicidal iatrogenic psychiatric-like symptoms resulting from confounding and DIMD with psychiatric symptoms, such as confounding and with and retardation, akathisia with anxiety and and and dyskinesias with and schizophrenic psychiatric schizophrenic symptoms associated with DIMD caused by supersensitivity psychosis, which we are now to first reported drug-induced associated with TD a in and increased receptor after long-term treatment with classical antipsychotics, and we this supersensitivity psychosis. We that TD and supersensitivity psychosis with the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic, given risk not and at the same The debate continues on how to most withdraw antipsychotic [1] and and psychiatric syndromes associated with types of syndromes have been with the discontinuation of (1) withdrawal syndromes and major (2) syndromes anxiety and which have been reported with and (3) supersensitivity syndromes such as TD and supersensitivity psychosis These discontinuation syndromes all produce psychiatric symptoms that can be confounded with true of the original illness. In a recent review of the on psychosis the importance of between antipsychotic withdrawal effects related to the course of the original illness and drug-induced effects such as supersensitivity psychosis. due to the discontinuation of a drug can be differentiated from the course of original illness and more long-term maintenance treatment could be reduced and in patients The long-term maintenance with second-generation antidepressants and of a major depressive disorder is of the in and during long-term maintenance treatment. The has also recently been to produce a persistent disorder following withdrawal to be related to supersensitivity When discontinuing antipsychotics and antidepressants, the of supersensitivity syndromes and other iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes must be to high doses or of outpatients and with schizophrenia treated with a classical antipsychotic treatment also included 1 but no antidepressants, no and no showed a prevalence of 22% for supersensitivity psychosis The prevalence of TD using Schooler and Kane criteria, was that found for supersensitivity psychosis. cases of supersensitivity psychosis increased the prevalence of supersensitivity psychosis to psychosis was associated with a higher maintenance dose of classical antipsychotics, high and schizophrenia with a The higher antipsychotic dose and higher associated with supersensitivity psychosis to the of supersensitivity and these results that lower doses of antipsychotics could the appearance of supersensitivity psychosis. In this study, there was no found between TD and supersensitivity psychosis, due to TD being associated with schizophrenia and supersensitivity psychosis with higher antipsychotic dose was not to be a risk for TD, whereas increased was associated with TD but not associated with supersensitivity psychosis. is that most patients in this study were treated with which has a high for the D2 which could to both a high incidence of supersensitivity psychosis and DIMD as the drug is known to produce a high incidence of symptoms psychosis, in its masked and withdrawal is known to occur 6 following the decrease or withdrawal of an antipsychotic or 3 months for a long-acting injectable We have proposed that TD and supersensitivity psychosis can result from the of in the caused by following in D2 with high for The of supersensitivity psychosis and TD share can both occur after long-term use of antipsychotics and can and difficult to with of the antipsychotic stress both TD and supersensitivity psychosis and both can be by and by and TD was to be the predictor of supersensitivity psychosis in our and follow-up study of supersensitivity psychosis [4, TD and supersensitivity psychosis may or may not occur in the same time but TD is associated with supersensitivity psychosis when it occurs during withdrawal of antipsychotics These two supersensitivity syndromes have been difficult to study due to the fact that antipsychotics can their appearance further with supersensitivity psychosis is that symptoms the original illness and true however, supersensitivity psychosis can be as it more after of the antipsychotic than true occurs with high doses of antipsychotics and not with antipsychotic treatment and therapeutic to antipsychotic treatment after drug response time, as therapeutic there is further of supersensitivity and further syndromes, TD, can (1) or (2) persistent or (3) reversible or symptoms can persist for several months or years and can still be reversible or When persistent and supersensitivity symptoms symptoms, being severer than the original symptoms, but these supersensitivity symptoms persist in contrast to symptoms and may include symptoms atypical antipsychotics, it has been proposed that supersensitivity psychosis occurs more with antipsychotics with from the D2 receptor The 2 atypical antipsychotics most associated with supersensitivity psychosis are quetiapine and which both have loose binding properties at the D2 receptor An additional which and severe in the withdrawal of is its effect as an receptor Thus, for the withdrawal would be by the receptor following of at this drug in the of the a and psychosis results cases of supersensitivity psychosis have also been reported with olanzapine psychosis was found to be associated with quetiapine in our 3-year study of quetiapine in 23 outpatients with schizophrenia and schizoaffective disorder who had previously been treated with classical antipsychotics risperidone, and had symptoms and of side effects [19]. As in our of the CATIE study, 7 patients after a minimum of 3 months of stabilized treatment and 6 of these patients met the criteria for supersensitivity psychosis [19]. the 11 of patients with baseline TD relapsed, the that TD to supersensitivity psychosis and have been to be efficacious in of patients with supersensitivity psychosis We also recommend the use of in supersensitivity and anxiety disorder induced by the discontinuation of the An can be used in with an antipsychotic or an in to more decrease or withdraw these and find the minimal therapeutic dose for patients who still need long-term treatment. a minimal therapeutic dose with an has an additional for a drug olanzapine, as the dose will significant side In in the of Mental Health psychiatric 35% of patients with a of schizophrenia and For severe cases of schizophrenia, the use of or is in to drug to antipsychotic While is less than or it is superior to for anxiety and the of optimal minimal maintenance drug treatment. proposed the beneficial results of treatment in schizophrenia is their effect We have also related their beneficial effects to an of a We recommend treatment as a first for from treatment, can also be prescribed as with as it has a In a and that and had than other in addition, emerging that may improve DIMD has also been to be effective as an to antipsychotic monotherapy in patients with schizophrenia who treatment We that of cases of schizophrenia can be related to supersensitivity psychosis. In patients for maintenance treatment is a minimal therapeutic dose can be with the use of an that will patients from antipsychotic or conclusion, DIMD-induced psychiatric symptoms and supersensitivity syndromes will to to results such as found in the CATIE study which show that olanzapine is the only atypical antipsychotic more efficacious than a classical The proposed for psychiatric and psychiatric-like symptoms associated with DIMD may to the of all classical antipsychotics and the use of higher doses and longer than of atypical antipsychotics. research is in to develop to distinguish between true and iatrogenic discontinuation syndromes and to to more withdraw antipsychotics and antidepressants by and supersensitivity syndromes, for the antipsychotics and quetiapine and for the may to further of DIMD, TD and supersensitivity psychosis as we to more differences in the of As most of antipsychotics and second-generation antidepressants are not routinely or for more differences in drug will also to prescribe minimal therapeutic doses of antipsychotics and antidepressants for greater efficacy and better in the maintenance has and the last 3 years from and

Psychotherapy and Psychosomatics · editorial or comment · 168 citationsread the source →

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY OF DEPRESSION: DO WE HAVE ANY SOLID EVIDENCE OF INTEREST TO CLINICIANS?

Major depressive disorder (MDD) is a common and costly disorder which is usually associated with severe and persistent symptoms leading to important social role impairment and increased mortality 1,2. It is one of the most important causes of disability worldwide 3. The high rate of inadequate treatment of the disorder remains a serious concern 1. This review is aimed at summarizing the solid evidence on the etiology and pathophysiology of MDD that is likely relevant for clinical psychiatry. Neurobiological findings are regarded as solid when they are consistent and convergent, i.e., they have been confirmed by several studies using the same method and fit into results from studies using different methodological approaches. Family, twin, and adoption studies provide very solid and consistent evidence that MDD is a familial disorder and that this familiality is mostly or entirely due to genetic factors 4. This important finding suggests that parental social behavior and other familial environmental risk factors are not as important in the pathogenesis of MDD as previously assumed and should not be the major focus of the treatment of the disorder. The above-mentioned studies consistently show that the influence of genetic factors is around 30–40% 4. Non-genetic factors, explaining the remaining 60–70% of the variance in susceptibility to MDD, are individual-specific environmental effects (including measurement error effects and gene-environment interactions). These effects are mostly adverse events in childhood and ongoing or recent stress due to interpersonal adversities, including childhood sexual abuse, other lifetime trauma, low social support, marital problems, and divorce 5,6. These results suggest that there is a huge potential in the prevention of MDD by means of psychosocial interventions (e.g., in schools, at workplace). In addition, these results mirror the clinical practice of empirically validated psychotherapies to treat depression 7,8,9, including interpersonal, psychodynamic and cognitive behavioral psychotherapies and cognitive behavioural analysis system of psychotherapy, which all focus directly or indirectly on interpersonal difficulties and skills. This does not exclude the fact that unidentified non-genetic, non-psychosocial risk factors may also play important roles in some patients (e.g., climatic change, medical conditions). Stress sensitivity in depression is partly gender-specific. While men and women are, in general, equally sensitive to the depressogenic effects of stressful life events, their responses vary depending upon the type of stressor. Specifically, men are more likely to have depressive episodes following divorce, separation, and work difficulties, whereas women are more sensitive to events in their proximal social network, such as difficulty getting along with an individual, serious illness, or death 10. These findings point to the importance of gender-sensitive psychosocial approaches in the prevention and treatment of MDD. In contrast to the very solid evidence from epidemiological studies on broad risk factor domains, there is no solid evidence for specific genes and specific gene-by-environment interactions in the pathogenesis of MDD. Genome-wide association studies have indicated that many genes with small effects are involved in complex diseases, increasing the difficulty in identifying such genes 11. While there has been progress in the search for risk genes for several complex diseases despite this methodological problem 12, psychiatric conditions have turned out to be very resistant to robust gene identification. For example, based on a community-based prospective study, it has been proposed that a specific genetic variation in the promoter region of the serotonin transporter (a target of antidepressant drugs) interacts with stressful life events in the pathogenesis of depression 13. Although there is high clinical and neurobiological plausibility of this interaction, a recent meta-analysis yielded no evidence that the serotonin transporter gene alone or in interaction with psychological stress was associated with the risk of depression 14. The limited success of genetic studies of depression has been related to use of current classification schemas including ICD-10 and DSM-IV. These diagnostic manuals are based on clusters of symptoms and characteristics of clinical course that do not necessarily describe homogenous disorders but instead reflect common final pathways of different pathophysiolgical processes 15,16. The clinician should be aware that family history will continue to be the most solid source of information to estimate the genetic risk of MDD. Corticotropin-releasing hormone (CRH) is released from the hypothalamus in response to the perception of psychological stress by cortical brain regions. This hormone induces the secretion of pituitary corticotropin, which stimulates the adrenal gland to release cortisol into the plasma. The physiologic response to stress is partly gender-specific: women show generally greater stress responsiveness than men, which is consistent with the greater incidence of major depression in women 17. Moreover, men show greater cortisol responses to achievement challenges, whereas women show greater cortisol responses to social rejection challenges 18. Although MDD is considered as a stress disorder, most subjects treated for MDD have no evidence of dysfunctions of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis (HPA) 19. However, some subjects with MDD do show abnormalities of that axis and of the extrahypothalamic CRH system 20. Altered stress hormone secretion appeared to be most prominent in depressed subjects with a history of childhood trauma 21. Elevated cortisol may act as a mediator between major depression and its physical long-term consequences such as coronary heart disease, type II diabetes, and osteoporosis 22. The importance of HPA axis dysfunction for the efficacy of antidepressants is a matter of debate 23. This axis is regulated through a dual system of mineralocorticoid (MR) and glucocorticoid (GR) receptors. Decreased limbic GR receptor function 24,25 and increased functional activity of the MR system 26 suggest an imbalance in the MR/GR ratio in stress-related conditions such as MDD. Epigenetic regulation of the glucocorticoid receptors has been associated with childhood abuse 27. Such environmental programming of gene expression may represent one possible mechanism that links early life stress to abnormal HPA axis function and increased risk of MDD in adults. While the CRH stimulation test (dex/CRH test) 28 is a sensitive measure of the HPA axis dysfunction in depression, the specificity of this test for MDD is low. However, non-suppression in the dex/CRH test has consistently predicted increased risk for depressive relapse during clinical remission 23. Additionally, the measurement of waking salivary cortisol concentration has been shown to be a simple and sensitive test for HPA axis hyperactivity in depression 29. Hypercortisolemia is almost exclusively found in subjects with severe and psychotic depression, in whom glucocorticoid antagonists may have some therapeutic effect 30. There is convergent evidence for CRH to play a major role in the pathogenesis of certain types of depression. Levels of CRH in the cerebrospinal fluid are elevated in some depressed subjects 31. Post-mortem studies reported an increased number of CRH secreting neurons in limbic brain regions in depression 32, likely reflecting a compensatory response to increased CRH concentrations 33. In addition, CRH produces a number of physiological and behavioral alterations that resemble the symptoms of major depression, including decreased appetite, disrupted sleep, decreased libido, and psychomotor alterations 34. There is also preliminary evidence that CRH1 receptor antagonists reduce symptoms of depression and anxiety 35. “Sickness behavior” as a result of an activation of the inflammatory response system shares many symptoms with depression, including fatigue, anhedonia, psychomotor retardation, and cognitive impairment. Sickness is mediated by pro-inflammatory cytokines such as interleukin-1α, tumor necrosis factor-α, and interleukin-6, which activate the HPA axis and impair the central serotonin system 36. The prevalence of depression as an unwanted effect of recombinant interferons is around 30% 37. In animals, blocking pro-inflammatory cytokine-mediated signaling produces antidepressant-like effects 38. Clinical data suggest that cytokines may play a role in the pathophysiology of a subgroup of depressed subjects, particularly those with comorbid physical conditions 36. The antidepressant enhancing effect of acetylsalicylic acid 39 points to the possible clinical relevance of psychoneuroimmunology in clinical depression research. Taken together, the laboratory tests with the highest potential to be clinically useful in the care of depressed individuals are based on abnormalities of the neuroendocrine and neuroimmune systems. Despite the large amount of basic science data suggesting that the HPA axis is importantly involved in the pathophysiology of depression, the effect of pharmacological modulation of this neuroendocrine system as antidepressant therapy has been disappointing. The link between childhood trauma and a permanently altered physiologic stress system points to the use of specific psychotherapies in the treatment of depressed patients with a history of early life trauma 40. Most of the serotonergic, noradrenergic and dopaminergic neurons are located in midbrain and brainstem nuclei and project to large areas of the entire brain. This anatomy suggests that monoaminergic systems are involved in the regulation of a broad range of brain functions, including mood, attention, reward processing, sleep, appetite, and cognition. Almost every compound that inhibits monoamine reuptake, leading to an increased concentration of monoamines in the synaptic cleft, has been proven to be a clinically effective antidepressant 19. Inhibiting the enzyme monoamine oxidase, which induces an increased availability of monoamines in presynaptic neurons, also has antidepressant effects. These observations led to the pharmacologically most relevant theory of depression, referred to as the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis. The monoamine-deficiency theory posits that the underlying pathophysiological basis of depression is a depletion of the neurotransmitters serotonin, norepinephrine or dopamine in the central nervous system. Serotonin is the most extensively studied neurotransmitter in depression. The most direct evidence for an abnormally reduced function of central serotonergic system comes from studies using tryptophan depletion, which reduces central serotonin synthesis. Such a reduction leads to the development of depressive symptoms in subjects at increased risk of depression (subjects with MDD in full remission, healthy subjects with a family history of depression) 41,42, possibly mediated by increased brain metabolism in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex and subcortical brain regions 42. Experimentally reduced central serotonin has been associated with mood congruent memory bias, altered reward-related behaviors, and disruption of inhibitory affective processing 16, all of which add to the clinical plausibility of the serotonin deficiency hypothesis. There is also evidence for abnormalities of serotonin receptors in depression, with the most solid evidence pointing to the serotonin-1A receptor, which regulates serotonin function. Decreased availability of this receptor has been found in multiple brain areas of patients with MDD 43, although this abnormality is not highly specific for MDD and has been found in patients with panic disorder 44 and temporal lobe epilepsy 45, possibly contributing to the considerable comorbidity among these conditions. However, there is no explanation for the mechanism of serotonin loss in depressed patients, and studies of serotonin metabolites in plasma, urine and cerebrospinal fluid, as well as post-mortem research on the serotonergic system in depression, have yielded inconsistent results. There is preliminary evidence that an increased availability of the brain monoamine oxidase, which metabolizes serotonin, may cause serotonin deficiency 46. In addition, loss-of-function mutations in the gene coding for the brain-specific enzyme tryptophan hydroxylase-2 may explain the loss of serotonin production as a rare risk factor for depression 47. Dysfunction of the central noradrenergic system has been hypothesized to play a role in the pathophysiology of MDD, based upon evidence of decreased norepinephrine metabolism, increased activity of tyrosine hydroxylase, and decreased density of norepinephrine transporter in the locus coeruleus in depressed patients 48. In addition, decreased neuronal counts in the locus coeruleus, increased alpha-2 adrenergic receptor density, and decreased alpha-1 adrenergic receptor density have been found in the brains of depressed suicide victims post-mortem 49. Since there is no method to selectively deplete central norepinephrine and no imaging tool to study the central norepinephrine system, solid evidence for abnormalities of this system in depression is lacking. While the classical theories of the neurobiology of depression mainly focused on serotonin and norepinephrine, there is increasing interest in the role of dopamine 50. Dopamine reuptake inhibitors (e.g., nomifensine) and dopamine receptor agonists (e.g., pramipexole) had antidepressant effects in placebo-controlled studies of MDD 51. In the cerebrospinal fluid and jugular vein plasma, levels of dopamine metabolites were consistently reduced in depression, suggesting decreased dopamine turnover 52. Striatal dopamine transporter binding and dopamine uptake were reduced in MDD, consistent with a reduction in dopamine neurotransmission 53. Degeneration of dopamine projections to the striatum in Parkinson's disease was associated with a major depressive syndrome in about one half of cases, which usually preceded the appearance of motor signs 54. Experimentally reduced dopaminergic transmission into the accumbens has been associated with anhedonic symptoms and performance deficits on a reward processing task in subjects at increased risk of depression 55,56. These findings are consistent with the clinical observation that depressed patients have a blunted reaction to positive reinforcers and an abnormal response to negative feedback 57. Almost all established antidepressants target the monoamine systems 58. However, full and partial resistance to these drugs and their delayed onset of action suggest that dysfunctions of monoaminergic neurotransmitter systems found in MDD represent the downstream effects of other, more primary abnormalities. Despite this limitation, the monoamine-deficiency hypothesis has proved to be the most clinically relevant neurobiological theory of depression. New findings on the role of dopamine in depression emphasize the scientific potential of this theory, and promising reports of antidepressant effects of drugs that modulate the dopaminergic system (e.g., pramipexole, modafinil) in difficult-to-treat depression underline its clinical relevance 51,59. Although many historical attempts to localize mental functions have failed, they have considerably contributed to a modern neuroscientific understanding of mental disorders 60. The development of neuroimaging techniques has opened up the potential to investigate structural and functional abnormalities in living depressed patients. Unfortunately, the diversity of imaging techniques used, the relatively small and heterogeneous study samples studied, and the limited overlap of results across imaging paradigms 61 make it difficult to reliably identify neuronal regions or networks with consistently abnormal structure or function in MDD. Functional imaging studies have provided the most limited overlap of findings. This may be due to methodological limitations and/or the complexity of neurocircuitry involved in MDD. A recent meta-analytic study found the best evidence for abnormal brain activity in MDD in lateral frontal and temporal cortices, insula, and cerebellum. In these brain regions activity was decreased at rest, they showed a relative lack of activation during induction of negative emotions, and an increase in activity following treatment with serotonin reuptake inhibitors. Opposite changes may exist in ventromedial frontal areas, striatum and possibly other subcortical brain regions 61. More solid evidence has been provided by structural imaging and post-mortem studies. A recent meta-analytic study on brain volume abnormalities in MDD revealed relatively large volume reductions in the ventromedial prefrontal cortex, particularly in the left anterior cingulate and in the orbitofrontal cortex. Moderate volume reductions were found in the lateral prefrontal cortex, hippocampus and striatum 62. Post-mortem studies consistently identified a reduction in glia cell density in dorsal, orbital and subgenual prefrontal cortices, as well as in the amygdala 63,64. Overall, functional, structural and post-mortem studies suggest that structural and functional abnormalities in the left subgenual cingulate cortex are the most solid neuroanatomical finding in MDD. Volume reduction in this region was found early in illness and in young adults at high familial risk for MDD 65, suggesting a primary neurobiological abnormality associated with the etiology of the illness. Humans with lesions that include the subgenual prefrontal cortex showed abnormal autonomic responses to social stimuli 66, and rats with left-sided lesions in this region had increased sympathetic arousal and corticosterone responses to restraint stress 67. Most importantly, chronic deep brain stimulation to reduce the potentially elevated activity in the subgenual cingulated cortex produced clinical benefits in patients with treatment-resistant depression 68. In summary, despite the considerable heterogeneity of findings from neuroimaging studies, there is convergent evidence for the presence of abnormalities in the subgenual prefrontal cortex in some patients with MDD. Neuroanatomical research in depression is of great clinical interest, since novel antidepressant treatments such as deep brain stimulation can target specific brain regions. In addition, there are promising leads for neuroimaging findings to predict the likelihood of responses to specific treatments 69. Risk factors for depressive episodes change during the course of the illness. The first depressive episode is usually “reactive”, i.e., triggered by important psychosocial stressors, while subsequent episodes become increasingly “endogenous”, i.e., triggered by minor stressors or occurring spontaneously 70. There is consistent evidence that the volume loss of the hippocampus and other brain regions is related to the duration of depression 71, suggesting that untreated depression leads to hippocampal volume loss, possibly resulting in increased stress sensitivity 72 and increased risk of recurrence 73. Glucocorticoid neurotoxicity, glutamatergic toxicity, decreased neurotrophic factors, and decreased neurogenesis have been proposed as possible mechanisms explaining brain volume loss in depression. There is no solid evidence on of these since there are no imaging to directly and neurotrophic processes in neurotrophic factor has considerable Specifically, studies have shown between and in hippocampal as well as expression of following antidepressant treatment The clinician should be aware of the potentially effect of depression and treat depressed patients as early and as A of studies consistently showed reductions in acid concentrations in the prefrontal and cortex in depression This may reflect stress since psychological stress to presynaptic of prefrontal neurotransmission low concentration may reflect reduction in the density and of In addition, chronic stress may reduce receptor possibly through changes in evidence of the hypothesis of depression the lack of effects of drugs on depressive symptoms and prefrontal concentration in subjects with MDD of evidence suggest a dysfunction of the neurotransmitter system in a of the receptor produced and large antidepressant effects in patients with treatment-resistant MDD inhibitors of release (e.g., antidepressant abnormal levels were found in depressed subjects as by and there is evidence for abnormal signaling in post-mortem Since is the major neurotransmitter involved in almost every brain the of the specific role of in depression (e.g., there are promising leads that the receptor is involved in MDD and are diagnostic for MDD, suggesting regulation in depressed patients. In addition, some depressive symptoms may show psychomotor of of positive and negative and a subgroup of patients with MDD may have a disorder In healthy young subjects, changes in the of the had specific effects on subsequent mood In depressed patients, of can have antidepressant on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of on these abnormalities have been hypothesized to be associated with MDD The association between of the and in cortisol in some subjects with and the effect of antidepressants on of and to the of this hypothesis Despite of the many promising the and genetic of this hypothesis are It remains to be antidepressant effects of such as directly to of The and of the neurobiological of depression are in 1. The many theories of depression and the relatively low response rate of all antidepressant treatments a hypothesis of and suggest that depression is a clinically and heterogeneous disorder. This research on of the response to therapeutic interventions using such as neuroimaging and neuroendocrine tests in with for with to stress sensitivity and antidepressant The of of therapeutic will for the development of that has the potential to interventions and to up pathways in the of novel therapeutic approaches.

World Psychiatry · editorial or comment · 607 citationsread the source →